all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
Installation Manual | Users Manual | 1.76 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Part 1 | Users Manual | 2.17 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Part 2 | Users Manual | 1.89 MiB | ||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos |
1 2 | Installation Manual | Users Manual | 1.76 MiB |
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL WIRELESS GIGABIT ETHERNET BRIDGE
(5.3/5.8 GHz UNII/LE-LAN1000BaseF) MAN-27900 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Installation and Maintenance Manual Copyright 2000 by Western Multiplex. All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without prior written permission from Western Multiplex. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Western Multiplex shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual or equipment supplied with this manual. Western Multiplex makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual or any equipment supplied with this manual, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. is a registered product of Andrews Corporation. is a registered product of Hewlett Packard Corporation. is a registered product of NetCom Systems Inc. is a registered product of Microsoft Inc. Heliax OpenView SmartBits Windows Chariot Gabriel dual-band/dual polarized flat or parabolic antennas are products of Gabriel Electronics Inc. RadioWave dual-band/dual polarized, flat or parabolic antennas are products of Radio Wave Corp. Other names are trademarks of their owners are a registered products of Ganymede Software Inc. and Qcheck Printed in the United States of America Notice: Y2K (Year 2000 Issue) All software supplied by and for Western Multiplex products adheres to the four-(4) digit year nomenclature as required for Year 2000 compliance. Western Multiplex 1196 Borregas Avenue Sunnyvale, California USA Tel:
+1 408 542-5200 Fax:: +1 408 542-5300 e-mail: info@wmux.com Our facility has been Registered to the International Organization for Standardization ISO 9000 Series Standards for quality. Issue: January 2001 i I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Revision history:
November 2000:
December 2000:
First version Draft version Added updated drawings Front panel LED detail Update NMS screen captures January 2001 Replaced Browser NMS graphics ii I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Regulatory Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and is to be installed and used in accordance with the instructions. Shielded cables and I/O cords must be used for this equipment to comply with the relevant FCC regulations. Changes or modifications not expressly approved in writing by Western Multiplex may void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This device must be professionally installed. iii I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 This page intentionally left blank iv I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 WARRANTY GENERAL TERMS 1.1 All Definitions contained in Western Multiplex's Conditions of Sale
(Western Multiplex document number CS96-8), apply to the Warranty. 1.2 Subject to the provisions of the Warranty, Western Multiplex warrants that the equipment described in Paragraph 1.3 shall conform to their specifications described in Paragraph 1.4 in all material respects and that the equipment shall be free from material defects in materials and workmanship. 1.3 This Warranty applies to all original purchases of Western Multiplex manufactured equipment and accessories (collectively the "Equipment"). 1.4 This Warranty applies to the specifications contained in the most recent version of the manual for the model of the Equipment purchased (the "Specifications"). 1.5 This Warranty does not apply to the following items of Equipment which are covered by the Original Equipment Manufacturer's warranty:
(a) antenna systems, including coax cable, waveguide, connectors flex-sections, mounts, other parts of the antenna system and installation materials;
(b) non-Western Multiplex manufactured rack mounted equipment that is assembled wired and tested at Western Multiplex's factory or supplied as part of a system, including orderwire items, channel banks, multiplexers, fuse/alarm panels, remote alarm items; and equipment which is not listed in Western Multiplex's price book.
(c) 1.6 The effective period of this Warranty shall start on the date of shipment of the Equipment and shall end:
(a)
(b)
(c) for all spread spectrum unlicensed radio products and for all licensed digital microwave radio products, two (2) years later;
for all analog microwave radio products, three (3) years later; or for all baseband products, five (5) years later (in each case the
"Warranty Period"). 1.7 The Customer acknowledges that Western Multiplex does not represent or warrant that the services provided by Western Multiplex under this Warranty will ensure uninterrupted or error-
free operation of the Equipment. RETURN OF EQUIPMENT UNDER WARRANTY 2.1 If an item of Equipment malfunctions or fails in normal intended usage and maintenance within the applicable Warranty Period:
the Customer shall promptly notify Western Multiplex of the problem and the serial number of the defective item;
(a)
(c)
(b) Western Multiplex shall, at its sole option, either resolve the problem over the telephone or provide the Customer with a Returned Materials Authorization number (RMA #) and the address of the location to which the Customer may ship the defective item;
if the problem is not resolved over the telephone, the Customer shall attach a label to each Returned item describing the fault and the Customer's Return address. The Customer shall, at its cost, properly pack the item to be Returned, prepay the insurance and shipping charges, and ship the item to the specified location;
if the Western Multiplex product shall prove to be defective in material or workmanship upon examination by Western Multiplex, Western Multiplex shall either repair or replace the Returned item at its sole option. The replacement item may be new or refurbished; if refurbished, it shall be equivalent in operation to new Equipment. If a Returned item is replaced by Western Multiplex, the Customer agrees that the Returned item shall become the property of Western Multiplex.
(d)
(e) Western Multiplex shall at its cost, ship the repaired item or replacement to any destination within the United States of America by carrier and method of delivery chosen by Western Multiplex. If the Customer has requested some other form of conveyance, such as express shipping, or is located beyond the USA borders, then the Customer shall pay to the cost of return shipment. 2.2 Equipment which is repaired or replaced by Western Multiplex under this Warranty shall be covered under all of the provisions of this Warranty for the remainder of the applicable Warranty Period or ninety (90) days from the date of shipment of the repaired item or replacement, whichever period is longer. DEFAULT AND TERMINATION 3.1 Western Multiplex may immediately terminate this Warranty and all of its performance under this Warranty, upon notification to the Customer, if the Customer:
(a) makes any unauthorized modifications to the Equipment;
(b) assigns or transfers the Customer's rights or obligations under this Warranty without the written consent of Western Multiplex;
becomes bankrupt or insolvent, or is put into receivership; or
(c)
(d) has not paid Western Multiplex all amounts for the Equipment, services, or other additional charges within thirty (30) days of receipt of written notice from Western Multiplex. 3.2 If this Warranty is terminated by Western Multiplex, the Customer shall remain liable for all amounts due to Western Multiplex. FORCE MAJEURE 4.1
"Force Majeure" has the same meaning as defined in Western Multiplex's Conditions of Sale (Western Multiplex document number CS96-8). Western Multiplex shall not be responsible for failure to discharge its obligations under this Warranty due to Force Majeure. 4.2 LIMITATIONS AND QUALIFICATIONS OF WARRANTY 5.1 This Warranty does not apply to any damage, defect or failure caused by:
(a) any part of the Equipment having been modified, adapted, repaired, or improperly installed, operated, maintained, transported or relocated by any person other than Western Multiplex personnel or a Western Multiplex authorized service agent, without Western Multiplex's prior written consent;
storage or environmental conditions which do not conform to the applicable sections of the appropriate Western Multiplex Equipment Manual;
failure to conform with the Equipment Installation, Operating and Maintenance Instructions of the appropriate Western Multiplex Equipment Manual;
(b)
(c)
(d) external causes, including external electrical stress or lightning, or use in conjunction with incompatible equipment, unless such use was with Western Multiplex's prior written consent;
cosmetic damage;
accidental damage, negligence, neglect, mishandling, abuse or misuse, other than by Western Multiplex personnel or a Western Multiplex authorized service agent; or
(e)
(f)
(g) Force Majeure. Please see reverse side for additional limitations on damages. v W/CS97-1 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 LIMITATIONS ON DAMAGES (North America) 6.1 THE WARRANTY STATED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITATIONS ON DAMAGES (International) 6.1 THE WARRANTY STATED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS THE CUSTOMER'S EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY FOR THE EQUIPMENT; WESTERN MULTIPLEX SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND OF MERCHANTABILITY. 6.2 WESTERN MULTIPLEX SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN TORT, INCLUDING LIABILITY IN NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY, AND SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY AT ALL FOR INJURY TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY. WESTERN MULTIPLEX'S LIABILITY FOR FAILURE TO FULFIL ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR ANY OTHER LIABILITY UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE EQUIPMENT. THE REMEDIES STATED IN THIS WARRANTY ARE THE CUSTOMER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AGAINST WESTERN MULTIPLEX REGARDING THE EQUIPMENT. 6.3 EVEN IF WESTERN MULTIPLEX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF THEM, WESTERN MULTIPLEX SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING THE COST OF LABOR BY THE CUSTOMER'S OWN EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR CONTRACTORS IN IDENTIFYING, REMOVING OR REPLACING THE DEFECTIVE ITEM;
LOST PROFITS, AND REVENUES; FAILURE TO REALIZE EXPECTED SAVINGS; ANY CLAIM AGAINST A CUSTOMER BY A THIRD PARTY; OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC LOSSES OF ANY KIND. 6.4 THESE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS ARE NOT MADE BY WESTERN MULTIPLEX WHERE PROHIBITED BY LAW. THE CUSTOMER'S EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY FOR THE EQUIPMENT; ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND OF MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. 6.2 WESTERN MULTIPLEX'S LIABILITY FOR FAILURE TO FULFIL ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR IN TORT OR AS A RESULT OF STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER LIABILITY UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE EQUIPMENT OR ITS SUPPLY SHALL BE LIMITED, EXCEPT IN RESPECT OF DEATH AND PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY WESTERN MULTIPLEX'S NEGLIGENCE, TO THE AMOUNT OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE EQUIPMENT. THE REMEDIES STATED IN THIS WARRANTY ARE THE CUSTOMER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AGAINST WESTERN MULTIPLEX REGARDING THE EQUIPMENT. 6.3 EVEN IF WESTERN MULTIPLEX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF THEM, WESTERN MULTIPLEX SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING THE COST OF LABOR BY THE CUSTOMER'S OWN EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR CONTRACTORS IN IDENTIFYING, REMOVING OR REPLACING THE DEFECTIVE ITEM;
LOST PROFITS, AND REVENUES; FAILURE TO REALIZE EXPECTED SAVINGS; ANY CLAIM AGAINST A CUSTOMER BY A THIRD PARTY; OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC LOSSES OF ANY KIND. W/CS97-1 vi I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 CONDITIONS OF SALE DEFINITIONS 1.1 on the the itemized equipment In these Conditions, unless there is something in the subject matter or context necessarily inconsistent:
"Western Multiplex" means Western Multiplex (d.b.a. Western Multiplex), Sunnyvale, CA;
"Equipment" means Quotation/Order Acknowledgment;
"International" means any location other than United States of America and Canada, including their territories and possessions;
"North America" means any location in the United States of America and Canada, including their territories and possessions;
"Order Acknowledgment" means the sales order acknowledgment provided by Western Multiplex to the Customer;
"Payment instructions, (Western Multiplex document P197-1);
"Quotation" means the quotation signed by an authorized representative of Western Multiplex and provided to the Customer;
"Shipping Date" means the actual date on which the Equipment left Western Multiplex's factory at Sunnyvale, CA, U.S.A.;
"Warranty" means Western Multiplex's warranty, document W97-1;
"Invoice" means the bill of goods prepared by Western Multiplex for the equipment with the shipping and any insurance costs. Instructions" means Western Multiplex's payment
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j) 1.2 Headings have been inserted in these Conditions for convenience of reference only and will not effect their construction. ENTIRE AGREEMENT 2.1 The Quotation, these Conditions of Sale, the Order Acknowledgment, the Payment Instructions and the Warranty shall apply to all sales made by Western Multiplex and shall constitute the entire agreement by Western Multiplex and the Customer (the
"Agreement "). 2.2 Any terms and/or conditions of sale, which may be included on the Customer's purchase order form or any communication from the Customer, that are not identical with the terms and conditions steed in this document shall NOT become a part of the agreement of sale unless expressly agreed to in writing in the Quotation. 2.3 Western Multiplex's failure to object to any terms and/or conditions of sale contained in any communication from the Customer shall not be considered as acceptance of such terms and/or conditions or as a waiver of the terms and conditions of sale contained herein. 2.4 Western Multiplex shall sell to the Customer, and the Customer shall purchase in accordance with the Agreement. Western Multiplex accepts the Customer's purchase orders for Equipment and agrees to deliver the Equipment to the Customer only on the terms of the Agreement. from Western Multiplex, the Equipment 2.5 No variation of the Agreement shall be binding unless agreed to in writing by authorized representatives of Western Multiplex and the Customer. PRICING 3.1 All prices in the Quotation are exclusive of all shipping charges and all applicable taxes including but not limited to, federal, state, local, excise, sales and use taxes. 3.2 All prices in the Quotation unless otherwise stated:
(a) for North American customers are FOB Sunnyvale, CA, USA.
(New York Uniform Commercial Code); or for international customers are Ex-Works, Sunnyvale, CA, U.S.A.
(Incoterms 1990).
(b) 3.3 All prices in the Quotation include standard domestic packing, unless a separate line item is provided detailing export or special packing charges. SHIPPING AND INSURANCE 4.1 Western Multiplex shall arrange shipping and insurance when requested by the Customer, and shall bill the Customer for the Equipment with the shipping and any insurance costs as separate items, on an invoice (the "Invoice"). 4.2 Delivery dates quoted by Western Multiplex are to be considered estimates only. In no event will Western Multiplex be liable for any loss or damage resulting from its failure to deliver products within a specified time. TERMS OF PAYMENT 5.1 The Customer shall pay for all Equipment, including shipping and insurance in accordance with the terms of the Invoice. 5.2 All Invoices for North American Customers are due and payable in 5.3
(a)
(b) 5.4 thirty (30) days from the date of the Invoice. International Customers shall make payments in accordance with Western Multiplex's Payment Instructions by either:
providing a wire transfer (telegraphic transfer) for the full amount of the Equipment, shipping and insurance charges contained in the Quotation or the pro-forma Invoice sent to the Customer, prior to the Shipping Date; or establishing an acceptable Letter of Credit (LC) for the full amount of the Equipment, shipping and insurance charges contained in the Quotation prior to the order being booked and accepted by Western Multiplex. If a Customer fails to pay an Invoice when due, Western Multiplex may, without prejudice to am other remedy, postpone shipments, alter payment terms, terminate the Agreement and charge interest on all overdue amounts the rate of 1.5% per month compounded monthly (or if less, the maximum allowed by law). Upon demand, the Customer shall pay all such interest charges and all reasonable collection fees, including reasonable legal expenses. SECURITY FOR PAYMENT 6.1 6.2
(a)
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(iii) If the Customer is located in North America, the Customer grants to Western Multiplex a purchase money security interest in the Equipment to secure the payment of the purchase price of the Equipment and all other amounts due from the Customer. If the Customer is not located in North America:
despite delivery and passing of risk in the Equipment and any other provision of these Conditions, the title in the Equipment shall not pass to the Customer until Western Multiplex has received payment in full of the purchase price of the Equipment and all other amounts then due from the Customer, and until the title in the Equipment passes to the Customer:
the Customer shall hold the equipment as Western Multiplex 's fiduciary agent and bailee, and shall properly store, protect and insure the Equipment and shall identify the Equipment as Western Multiplex property;
if the Customer fails to pay Western Multiplex in accordance with the agreed payment terms, Western Multiplex may require the Customer to deliver up the Equipment to Western Multiplex, and, if the Customer does not, Western Multiplex may enter on the premises where the Equipment is stored and repossess the Equipment; and the Customer shall not pledge the Equipment by way of security for any, indebtedness of the Customer, but if the Customer does so all moneys owed by the Customer to Western Multiplex shall, without prejudice to any other remedy of Western Multiplex, immediately become due. CHANGES TO PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 7.1 Western Multiplex may, without notice to the Customer, make changes to the specifications of Equipment which do not materially affect the quality or performance of the Equipment. EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION AND EXPEDITING CHARGES 8.1 At the Customer's request, Western Multiplex may, for a fee agreed in advance:
reconfigure the Equipment; or expedite the Customer's order.
(a)
(b) vii W/CS97-1 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 SHORTAGES 9.1 The customer shall not make any claim for shortages (which are items that the Invoice does not show are on back-order) after twenty-one (21) days after the date of the Invoice. 15.1 If either party is successful in any litigation between the parties based on the Agreement, the successful party shall recover from the other, in addition to direct damages, the successful party's reasonable attorney's fees and other costs of litigation. RETURNS AND EXCHANGES 10.1 The return of defective Equipment is covered by the Warranty . 10.2 The Customer may only return Equipment that is not defective if:
(a) the Equipment does not correspond with the Customer's purchase order; or the Equipment has been ordered in error by the Customer and Western Multiplex has permitted the Customer to remedy the mistake by ordering the correct equipment and resuming the Equipment and the Customer obtains a Returned Materials Authorization number ("RMA #") from Western Multiplex prior to returning any Equipment.
(b) 10.3 Western Multiplex reserves the right to charge a fee for returned equipment under Subparagraph 10.2(b) with the amount of the fee being determined prior to an RMA # being given by Western Multiplex. 10.4 Authorized returns of equipment under Paragraph 10.2 must be in an undamaged condition, in the original configuration, in the original packing materials and within a time period agreed to when the RMA # was issued. 10.5 If the Customer does not comply with the provisions of Paragraphs 10.2, 10.3, and 10.4, the Customer shall pay the full amount of the Invoice. 10.6 The party liable for all shipping, insurance and any other expenses incurred by the Customer in returning the Equipment under Paragraph 10.2 and for all loss or damage to the Equipment until received by Western Multiplex, shall be: (a) for all items returned under Subparagraph 10.2(a), Western Multiplex and (b) for all items resumed under Subparagraph 10.2(b), the Customer. CANCELLATION 11.1 If the Customer cancels an order before the Shipping Date, Western Multiplex reserves the right to charge the Customer a cancellation charge up to 100% of the amount of the order. 11.2 The Customer shall pay all cancellation charges within thirty (30) days from date of the Invoice. impractical due FORCE MAJEURE 12.1 Western Multiplex shall not be liable if its performance of the Agreement becomes commercially to any contingency beyond Western Multiplex's reasonable control, including acts of God, fires, floods, wars, sabotage, civil unrest, accidents, labor disputes or shortages, government laws, rules and regulations, whether valid or invalid, inability to obtain material, equipment or transportation, incorrect, delayed or incomplete specifications, drawings or data supplied by the Customer or others (collectively "Force Majeure"). In no event of Force Majeure shall Western Multiplex be required to purchase goods from others to enable it to deliver the Equipment under the Agreement. ENGINEERING AND SYSTEM DESIGN 13.1 The Customer is solely responsible for the engineering, design, integration and normal preventative and remedial maintenance of the Customer's system for which Western Multiplex supplies Equipment. 13.2 Western Multiplex is not responsible for the satisfactory operation of the Equipment in conjunction with other manufacturer's equipment, nor for any losses which may occur as a result of a failure of the Equipment to operate in conjunction with other manufacturer's equipment. INSOLVENCY OF CUSTOMER, ETC. 16.1 Western Multiplex may cancel the Agreement and suspend any further deliveries under the Agreement without any liability to the Customer, and, if Equipment has been delivered but not paid for, the price shall become immediately due and payable despite any other agreement to the contrary if:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e) any proceedings in bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership or liquidation are taken against the Customer;
the Customer makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors or commits an act of bankruptcy or insolvency;
the Customer ceases, or threatens to cease, to carry on the ordinary course of its business, or transfers all or substantially all of its property;
the Equipment is seized under any legal process or confiscated; or Western Multiplex in good faith believes that the ability of the Customer to pay or perform any provision of the Agreement is impaired, or that any of the events mentioned above is about to occur. NOTICE 17.1 All requests, instructions and notices from one party to the other must be in writing and may be given via registered post or facsimile transmission to the address of the parties shown on the Quotation or Order Acknowledgment. EXPORT PROVISIONS 18.1 The Customer shall not, whether directly or indirectly (including facilitating a third party) export or re-export the Equipment outside the country in which the Customer has stated these items are to be used without obtaining the licenses required under ail applicable rules. The Customer shall indemnify Western Multiplex against any liability incurred by Western Multiplex due to any violation by the Customer of any of the provisions of this Section, but this indemnity shall not apply if the Customer reasonably relies on information supplied to it by Western Multiplex with respect to export licenses. Upon receipt of a governmental consent to export the receiving party shall immediately notify the other in writing. MISCELLANEOUS 19.1 No waiver by Western Multiplex of any breach of this Agreement shall be considered as a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other provision. 19.2 Any provision of the Agreement which is, or is deemed to be, unenforceable in any jurisdiction shall be severable from the Agreement in that jurisdiction without in any way invalidating the remaining portions of the Agreement, and that unenforceability shall not make in any other jurisdiction. that provision unenforceable 19.3 The rights which accrue to Western Multiplex by virtue of the Agreement shall inure for the benefit of and be binding upon the successors and assigns of Western Multiplex. 19.4 The agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California including the California Uniform Commercial Code. However Western Multiplex may enforce the provisions of the Agreement in accordance with the laws of the jurisdiction in which the Equipment is situated. The United Nations Convention on the Sale of Goods (The Vienna Convention) shall not apply to the Agreement. 19.5 Les parties ont exigs que cette entente soit rdige en anglais. WARRANTY 14.1 All Equipment is covered by the Warranty. 14.2 THE WARRANTY CONTAINS LlMITATIONS ON THE CUSTOMER'S RIGHTS AND REMEDIES AGAINST WESTERN MULTIPLEX AGREEMENT. THE CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES HAVING READ, UNDERSTOOD AND AGREED TO THOSE LIMITATIONS. UNDER THE DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF AGREEMENT W/CS97-1 viii I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Table of Contents 1. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 MANUAL ORGANIZATION............................................................................................................................ 1-1 ICONS ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.2 2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................................ 2-1 SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................................................................................... 2-2 Transmitter ........................................................................................................................................ 2-2 2.2.1 Antenna / Antenna Coupling Unit...................................................................................................... 2-3 2.2.2 Receiver ............................................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.2.3 System (Single Hop Performance) ..................................................................................................... 2-4 2.2.4 Line Interfaces ................................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.2.5 Auxiliary Connections........................................................................................................................ 2-5 2.2.6 Temperature and Environment .......................................................................................................... 2-6 2.2.7 Power................................................................................................................................................. 2-6 2.2.8 2.2.9 Regulatory Information ..................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.2.10 Mechanical ........................................................................................................................................ 2-6 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................... 2-6 General .............................................................................................................................................. 2-7 Test Points on ODU........................................................................................................................... 2-8 Alarm and Status Indicators .............................................................................................................. 2-9 Controls ........................................................................................................................................... 2-10 Connections ..................................................................................................................................... 2-11 REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................................... 2-13 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES.................................................................................................................... 2-14 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3 2.4 2.5 3. INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS .......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 SHIPPING CONTAINER ................................................................................................................................. 3-1 PACKING ITEMS IDENTIFICATION ................................................................................................................ 3-2 BEFORE INSTALLATION TASK LIST ............................................................................................................. 3-3 Site Selection Requirements............................................................................................................... 3-3 Line-of-Sight and Path Clearance Guidelines................................................................................... 3-4 RSL Calculation and Link Budget ..................................................................................................... 3-5 Fade Margin Calculation .................................................................................................................. 3-6 Availability Calculation..................................................................................................................... 3-6 Power Supply Planning ..................................................................................................................... 3-7 Antenna Planning .............................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.4 TOOLS REQUIRED ....................................................................................................................................... 3-8 3.6 MOUNTING THE TSUNAMI RADIO ................................................................................................................ 3-9 3.7 POWER CONNECTION AND WIRING........................................................................................................... 3-11 DC Power Wiring ............................................................................................................................ 3-12 AC Power Connection ..................................................................................................................... 3-14 ANTENNA INSTALLATION & ALIGNMENT.................................................................................................. 3-15 Mounting plate to pole mounting assembly:.................................................................................... 3-16 Course Antenna Alignment .............................................................................................................. 3-18 ETHERNET INTERFACE CONNECTION........................................................................................................ 3-20 SYSTEM TURN-UP TO SERVICE ................................................................................................................. 3-21 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.9 3.10 3.8 TOC & INTRODUCTION i I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.11 ADDITIONAL CONNECTIONS...................................................................................................................... 3-24 3.11.1 Orderwire Connection................................................................................................................... 3-24 Alarm Connections .......................................................................................................................... 3-26 3.11.2 Configuration (Diagnostic) Port Operation .................................................................................... 3-28 3.11.3 AUX DATA (Digital Service Channel) Connection ......................................................................... 3-29 3.11.4 T1 (DSX-1) Interface Connection .................................................................................................... 3-30 3.11.5 3.11.6 CEPT-1 (E1) InterfaceConnection .................................................................................................. 3-30 NMS Interface Connection............................................................................................................... 3-30 3.11.7 4. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 REGULAR MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................................... 4-1 TECHNICAL SUPPORT.................................................................................................................................. 4-2 REPAIR POLICY........................................................................................................................................... 4-3 FRONT PANEL STATUS LEDS...................................................................................................................... 4-4 RF LINK Alarm.................................................................................................................................. 4-5 RADIO FAIL Alarm........................................................................................................................... 4-7 FAR END Alarm ................................................................................................................................ 4-8 ERRORS IN THE DATA STREAM ................................................................................................................... 4-9 BACK-TO-BACK TESTING ......................................................................................................................... 4-10 LINK TESTING ......................................................................................................................................... 4-12 NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (NMS)............................................................................................... 4-13 SNMP............................................................................................................................................... 4-13 Browser GUI.................................................................................................................................... 4-13 In-band NMS Set-up ........................................................................................................................ 4-13 Software Update Download Procedure ........................................................................................... 4-24 Telnet ............................................................................................................................................... 4-25 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.8.4 4.8.5 5. APPENDICES.................................................................................................................................................. 5-1 APPENDIX A - DIGITAL INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 5-1 1. General Characteristics (Regulatory) ....................................................................................................... 5-1 2. Specifications............................................................................................................................................. 5-1 APPENDIX B NETWORKING Q&AS ...................................................................................................................... 5-2 APPENDIX C AUXILIARY DATA CONNECTORS ................................................................................................... 5-17 APPENDIX D INSTALLATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING (FOLDOUT)..................................................................... 5-19 ii TOC & INTRODUCTION I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Figures FIGURE 2-1: IDU FRONT PANEL................................................................................................................................ 2-7 FIGURE 2-2: ODU ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-7 FIGURE 3-1: IDU AND ODU OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................... 3-9 FIGURE 3-2: ODU MOUNT WITH ANTENNA DETAIL.................................................................................................. 3-10 FIGURE 3-3: NEGATIVE VOLTAGE DC CONNECTION ................................................................................................ 3-13 FIGURE 3-4: POSITIVE VOLTAGE DC CONNECTION .................................................................................................. 3-13 FIGURE 3-5:.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-14 FIGURE 3-6: ODU MOUNTING.................................................................................................................................. 3-16 FIGURE 3-7: IDU AND ODU DUAL COAXIAL CONNECTIONS.................................................................................... 3-17 FIGURE 3-8: TYPICAL RSL VOLTAGE VERSUS RECEIVED SIGNAL LEVEL (RSL)....................................................... 3-19 FIGURE 3-9: ORDERWIRE & VF PORT CONNECTION ................................................................................................ 3-25 FIGURE 3-10: PIN CONNECTIONS, ALARM INTERFACE ........................................................................................... 3-26 FIGURE 3-11: RS-232 CONFIG PORT CONNECTIONS................................................................................................. 3-28 FIGURE 4-1: BACK-TO-BACK TEST CONFIGURATION................................................................................................ 4-11 FIGURE 4-2: END-TO-END TEST CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................... 4-12 FIGURE D-1: VF PORT CONNECTION........................................................................................................................ 5-17 FIGURE D-2: ALARM PORT CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................................... 5-17 FIGURE D-3: CONFIG(URATION) PORT 9-PIN D-STYLE CONNECTOR ........................................................................ 5-17 FIGURE D-4: AUX DATA PORT 9-PIN D-STYLE CONNECTOR................................................................................. 5-18 Tables TABLE 3-A: FADE MARGIN & AVAILABILITY CALCULATIONS.................................................................................... 3-6 TABLE 3-B: DC POWER CONNECTION FOR NEGATIVE SUPPLY ................................................................................ 3-11 TABLE 3-C: DC POWER CONNECTION FOR POSITIVE SUPPLY................................................................................... 3-11 TABLE 3-D: ALARM INTERFACE CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................................... 3-27 TABLE A-1: REGULATORY INFORMATION .................................................................................................................. 5-1 TABLE A-2: INTERCONNECTION SPECIFICATION......................................................................................................... 5-1 TOC & INTRODUCTION iii I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 1. How to Use This Manual 1.1 Manual Organization The Installation and Maintenance Manual provides information required to install and maintain Tsunami and to use its many features to the fullest advantage. This manual is divided into the following sections:
Section 1 Provides instructions on how to most effectively utilize the information in this manual. Section 2 Provides a brief description and specifications of the Tsunami. Section 3 Explains the Tsunami installation and adjustments in detail. Section 4 Provides maintenance, repair and troubleshooting information for the Tsunami Fast Ethernet radios. Appendices Charts and diagrams are provided for radio connections and DIP switch settings along with other general information. This device must be professionally installed. This device is to be used exclusively for fixed point-to-point operation that employs highly directional (<10) antennas. SECTION 1: HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL PAGE 1-1 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 1.2 Icons Throughout this manual, the following icons are used to highlight areas of special interest and importance. Note Practical Tip Caution PAGE 1-2 SECTION 1: HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2. Product Description 2.1 General Description The Tsunami licensed radios provide high capacity transmission and operational convenience in a digital communications network. These Tsunami radios provide 1000BaseF intelligent bridging between two fixed coordinated locations. Because each owner controls the operation of the link, there is no reliance on any outside services. Tsunami radio operators are able to operate whenever needed, and to be in control of their own network. The Tsunami offers two primary benefits:
v CONVENIENCE v CAPABILITY to install and operate with a user license Easy coordinated in the USA. (Other countries may also require a user license and/or frequency coordination). Full transparent Fast Ethernet connections with no throughput reduction over any line-of-sight distance (within legal limits of government regulation) Tsunami radios are ISO Layer 2 Data Link Layer (use MAC address for filtering) devices where they provide their full stated throughput. At level 2 (bridges) or 3/4 (routers) where hardware plays the major part, the most common tester is the SmartBits 200 product from NetCom Systems. At Application Layer 7, you will see less than 40% throughput from the maximum capacity measured with SmartBits due to the increased protocol/software overhead at that level. Layer 7 can be tested with software such as Ganymede's Chariot or Qcheck product (www.qcheck.net/index.html). Use Qcheck (or equivalent), do NOT use PING for throughput testing (www.qcheck.net/whyqcheck.html)!
As an example: testing copper CAT5e cable with SmartBits will test 100% throughput (let's say you can send/receive a full 100Mbps). At Layer 7 you will be transferring bits at the 100Mbps rate, but approximately only 45Mbps of user data will transfer (Ethernet has a high overhead of bytes added to each data packet frame each time you go up a layer). The advantage is the more complex overhead makes the data virtually resilient to corruption and minor errors (i.e. collisions), its easy to reroute and the network can use inexpensive plug/play devices like hubs/switches instead of multiplexers as used in the telco industry (i.e. LYNX T1/E1/DS3 radios) Western Multiplex tests for stated throughput at Layer 2/3 where bridges are defined. At layer 7
(application layer), you may see less than 50% or more depending on the other traffic that may be on the LAN as this layer is more dependent on the type of data being sent (it does not matter if it's wire, fiber or any Ethernet bridge -wired or wireless). Another way to look at it: the model 31145 12Mbps
(10Mbps 10BaseT+T1/E1 wayside) bridge will test the same as a piece of CAT5e Ethernet cable. SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-1 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2.2 Specifications All specifications are subject to change without notice. 2.2.1 Transmitter Frequency Selection A1 channel model 272XX-G1A1 (center frequency Tx=5775) A2 channel model 272XX-G1A2 (center frequency Tx=5300) Frequency Range 5250 5350 MHz 5725 5825 MHz
(100MHz BW)
(100MHz BW) Output Power +10 dBm (5.3 GHz band)
+17 dBm (5.8 GHz band)
(Note: output power is specified as guaranteed minimum before attenuation) Control Range 16 dB min (at ODU) DO NOT exceed the maximum transmit power setting as set at the factory!
Exceeding the factory-set power level will degrade the specifications of the radio and may also violate regulatory compliance. Output power may be attenuated from factory setting to comply with regulatory EIRP limits. PAGE 2-2 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2.2.2 Antenna / Antenna Coupling Unit Mechanics OutDoor Unit (ODU) attached to antenna w/two short coax cables InDoor Unit (IDU)attached to ODU via two (2) coax cables Antenna Connection Dual N female connectors (H and V polar connections) Impedance Recommended Gain & Beamwidth (3 dB) 1.5 ft Flat 2 ft Flat 2 ft Parabolic 4 ft Parabolic 6 ft Parabolic 2.2.3 Receiver 50 ohms 2 to 8 foot or 1.5 to 2 foot flat panel 25.5 dB / 8 28 dB / 4.6 28.5 dB / 6 35 dB / 3 38 dB / 2.9 All Models Nominal Receive Level
-30 to -68 dBm Maximum Receive Level
-10 dBm error free, 0 dBm no damage Frequency Selection None-use A1 or A2 models Threshold Rx Level (typ.)
(BER = 10-6) Frequency Range Bandwidths RSL Voltage
-70 dBm 5250 5350 MHz (100MHz BW) 5725 5825 MHz (100MHz BW)
~97MHz per channel per polarization 0.00 to 1.00 VDC (approximate RSL calculated by multiplying voltage times 100 and changing sign to negative value (example: 0.56vdc = 56dBm) SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-3 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2.2.4 System (Single Hop Performance) Error Floor Transmission delay
(radio only)
(10 mile path) 10-11 250 m sec, maximum 300 m sec, maximum 2.2.5 Line Interfaces Gigabit Ethernet Port:
Data Interface 1000BaseF (fully compatible with IEEE 802.3u) VPN (IEEE 802.1q) Ethernet port forces the sending device to break up jumbo frames into legal Ethernet frames that do not exceed the 1538 byte limit. In both cases, 802.1q frames are passed through the bridge (IEEE 802.1d) Connectors SC (fiber) 1300nm multimode to 2000m Configuration Full duplex on the WAN interface Filtering Buffer 15,000 packets per second theoretical, before forwarding 400 packets LAN Table 1,024 MAC addresses Self-learning Automatic learning and aging Digital Capacity
(ISO Layer 2) 480 Mbps Model: ~486 Mbps full duplex (>960 Mbps total) 720 Mbps Model: ~726 Mbps full duplex (>1440 Mbps total) PAGE 2-4 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 DS-1 (T1) Port:
Data Rate 1.544 Mbps (each of four ports) Digital Interface *
4 x DSX-1 Connector Line Code 8-pin modular jack female (RJ-48C) Pins:1=TT, 2=TR, 4=RT & 5=RR AMI / B8ZS (NMS selectable) Line Build Out 0-660 feet (NMS selectable) Blue Code **
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Loopback Near or far end (NMS selectable)
* Meets AT&T Pub 62411, Bellcore TR-TSY-000499.
** Signal is selectable (on/off) and is generated only on data loss or link failure when enabled. 2.2.6 Auxiliary Connections Orderwire Interface REN (Ringer Equivalency Number) DTMF tones Ringing Voltage 2-wire, 4-pin modular jack, female (RJ-11) 1.0 B within 1.5% of nominal freq. (+0-6 dB) 48 VDC, typical
(use telephones with solid state ringers, NOT adequate for older style mechanical ringers) VF Orderwire Bridge 600 ohm balanced, 4-wire, 0 dBm, DB-9, male Diag-nostic Port RS-232, DB-9, male Aux Data (clear service channel) RS-232, 9600 baud, DB-9, female Alarm Test Points 2 x Form C, DB-9, female Output Power Near-end and far-end received signal level (RSL) 100BaseT or F NMS Ethernet Port:
Data Interface 100BaseT or 100BaseF Connectors RJ-45/48c (wire) Pins:1=Tx+, 2=Tx-, 3=Rx+ & 6=Rx-
SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-5 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2.2.7 Temperature and Environment Operating Temperature Range (IDU)
-10 to +50C Operating Temperature Range (ODU)
-30 to +60C Humidity Altitude 2.2.8 Power DC Input Voltage Power Consumption 95% non-condensing 4,500 meters, maximum 37 to 63 VDC
~150 Watts Connector Barrier strip, plug-in type 2.2.9 Regulatory Information FCC Identifier HZB-U5358-480 HZB-U5358-720 HZB-U5358-1000 FCC Rule Parts 15.407 (UNII) 15.407 (UNII) 15.407 (UNII) Industry Canada ID TBD TBD TBD IC Rule Parts RS-210 (LE-LAN) RS-210 (LE-LAN) RS-210 (LE-LAN) 2.2.10 Mechanical Width (for 19-inch EIA rack mounting) Height (IDU) Depth Weight (IDU) 2.3 Front Panel Description 437 mm (17.2") rack mounting brackets supplied 44.5 mm (1.75") (1RU) 304 mm (12") 3 kg. (6.7 lbs.) ODU w/o Antenna 5.2 kg. (11.4 lbs.) PAGE 2-6 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2.3.1 General The Tsunami radio front panel (no user access on rear panel), as shown in Figure 2-1, has LED indicators, test points, controls and connections that are used for installation, maintenance, operation and troubleshooting. Prior to installation, it is best to be familiarize yourself with the front panel of your particular model. Sections 2.3.2 through 2.3.5 briefly describe the front panel access and indicators. Figure 2-1: IDU Front Panel Figure 2-2: ODU
(Shown without antenna attached) SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-7 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2.3.2 Test Points on ODU The Tsunami radio products do not have an on/off switch. GND RSL This is a grounding post to connect to earth ground. This is a test point (BNC connector) that relates to the Received Signal Level (RSL). The voltage is measured with a voltmeter (using the GND test point for reference) which corresponds to the actual power level of the incoming received signal. This is a test point which corresponds to the output transmit power of the radio. The voltage is measured with a voltmeter (using the GND test point for reference) which corresponds to the actual power level of the outgoing signal. This measurement is used during installation, maintenance and troubleshooting
. This voltage only applies to the near-end and does not allow measurement of the far-end output transmit power, even when the DISPLAY FAR END button is pressed. There is a receptacle on the front panel to the right of the LOCAL TX PWR test point which is an installation adjustment allowing the output transmit power to be increased or decreased within the radio's specified limits. Using a small screwdriver, this adjustment is used to set the output power of the transmitter, in accordance to the path planning. The Tsunami system requires professional installation. Transmitted output power limits may apply when using this radio. Consult FCC, IC, Western Multiplex or other regulatory authorities for limits which may apply. See Section 3.13.1 for details on setting output power. Do not adjust output power above factory settings. PAGE 2-8 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2.3.3 Alarm and Status Indicators IDU Cable ODU Radio Fail RF Link TXD RXD Green = Indoor Unit OK Red = Indoor Unit detected hardware failure Green = ODU Cable OK Red = ODU Cable shorted Green = Outdoor Unit OK Red = Outdoor Unit detected hardware failure Green = Radio hardware OK Red = Hardware failure detected Green = Error-free operation Yellow = Bit errors occurring Red = Excessive bit errors or radio link failure Flashing = Link security ID mismatch Green = 100BaseT data transmit present Yellow = 100BaseT port connected (no data present) Off = No 100BaseT connection detected Green = 100BaseT data receive present Yellow = 100BaseT port connected (no data present) Off = No 100BaseT connection detected COLL Yellow = Collisions occurring on 100BaseT (half-duplex mode) FAR END Red = Alarm(s) present on the far-end radio**
NMS (100Base) Green = Tx or Rx data present on the NMS interface Yellow = NMS interface connected (no data present) Off = No NMS interface connection detected T1 INPUT Green = Alarm enabled and T1 connection detected Red = Alarm enabled and no T1 connection detected Yellow = Alarm disabled and T1 connection detected Off = Alarm disabled and no T1 connection detected
** Radio Fail, RF Link (yellow or red), T1 Input (yellow or red) SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-9 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2.3.4 Controls DISPLAY FAR END This push-button provides the capability to determine alarms and status of the far-
end radio. When pressed and held, the alarm and status LEDs correspond to the far-end radios status. This can be used for installation, maintenance and troubleshooting. When the LED on this switch is flashing, no far-end information is available. This typically indicates that there is no link between near-end and far-end radios. PAGE 2-10 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2.3.5 Connections RF CONNECTION The RF port of this Tsunami radio is an N-type female connector that is used to connect to the ODU using coaxial transmission line. Use LDF4-50, LMR-400 or equivalent up to 100 meters (300 ft.) Use LDF4.5-50, LMR-600 or equivalent up to 300 meters (1000 ft.)
. DATA CONNECTION The connection for the Gigabit Ethernet interface that carries the signals in and out of the radio is an SC type 1000BaseF fiber connection. DC POWER CONNECTION The input accepts positive or negative DC power at any voltage between 37 and 63 Volts. OPTIONAL CONNECTIONS There are several connections that are not required for operation, but provide additional facilities to the user. EOW This connection is used to access the electronic orderwire function. This is a facility for "telephone" style service from one radio to another. A standard electronic telephone [one with a handset and DTMF (push-button tone) dialing] plugs into this connector. The user can dial the orderwire address of the far-end radio (or any radio in the Tsunami network) to establish telephone communication between sites. This communication does not interrupt or interfere with the other radio communications. The radio link must be operational to use this facility. The orderwire feature can be very useful for installation, maintenance and troubleshooting. VF This connector is used to link two Tsunami radios at a repeater site for Orderwire operation. This would allow orderwire "telephone" calls to and from any point in the Tsunami network. The Tsunami orderwire circuit can also be connected to other existing orderwire networks. See Section 3.14.1 for details. ALARM This connector is used for monitoring alarms electrically. The Form C relays can be connected to other transmission equipment for monitoring alarm status locally or remotely. DIAG This is a serial interface port (RS-232) to the Tsunami radio. This port provides configuration and maintenance information about the Tsunami radio(s) to a SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-11 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 connected computer or terminal. See section on TELNET session in this manual. AUX DATA This is a serial interface port (RS-232, 9600 baud) which allows the user to connect auxiliary serial data from one point in the radio network to another. It can be used for separate data connection for serial devices. 100Base NMS This is an Ethernet connection for access to the Tsunami NMS (SNMP or HTML). See section 4.11 for more detail for operation. T1 This is a wayside data channel for T1 (DS-1) interface of auxiliary traffic (27400-51 Models). PAGE 2-12 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2.4 Rear Panel Description The Tsunami radio rear panel, is blank. All connections and indications are on the front panel for single panel access SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-13 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2.5 Installation Accessories The Tsunami radio is shipped with several accessories commonly required for the radio as described below:
Rack Mount Brackets Two brackets (along with required mounting screws) are provided which allow 19-
inch rack mounting of the Tsunami radio. Terminal Connector D Connector 9-pin This is a 6-pin mating connector used for DC power supply. Four of these mating connectors are provided. One is used for the VF port, one for the CONFIG port, one for the ALARMS port and one for the AUX DATA port. Other accessories are available, such as orderwire handsets, connector adapters and special cables. These can be ordered separately upon request. PAGE 2-14 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3. Installation & Adjustments 3.1 Shipping Container The equipment is shipped in boxes unless ordered as an integrated system and configured at the factory, in which case the equipment may be racked and shipped in a crate. The equipment is packaged so as to prevent damage in transit. The boxes should be left intact and sheltered until arrival at the installation site. If the shipping container shows signs of damage, the transportation company should be notified immediately. Extra care and inspection of the contents is advised immediately upon receipt. It is recommended that all the packaging materials be retained. In the unlikely event that the equipment must be returned to the factory, use the original packing materials for return shipment. The original packaging materials are also recommended for transporting the equipment from location to location. Inside the primary shipping containers, internal boxes may contain other items. These boxes should also be saved for future use. Also, save the Tsunami radio test data sheet that is provided. The test data sheet can be placed where the Tsunami terminal will be installed for future quick reference. All Tsunami units are individually tested and the actual measured performance recorded on the Factory Test Data Sheet. You will find this information to be of use during installation, troubleshooting and maintenance. A set of quick installation instructions is also provided which can be useful for easy reference during installation. SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-1 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.2 Packing Items Identification The primary shipping container houses the radio along with other items including:
v This manual v Installation accessory kit (see Section 2.5) PAGE 3-2 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.3 Before Installation Task List There are several tasks that should be accomplished prior to installing the Tsunami radio system. This section briefly describes the following:
- Site selection
- Line-of-Sight and Path Clearance determination
- Anticipated RSL calculation
- Fade margin calculation
- Availability calculation
- Frequency plan determination
- Power supply planning
- Antenna (and accessories) purchase Only directional antennas should be used with Tsunami radios. These are typically flat panel or solid parabolic antennas. Western Multiplex recommends a maximum beamwidth of 10 degrees for directional systems. 3.3.1 Site Selection Requirements The radio site must have:
- access to the appropriate power
- close proximity to the telephone or computer system you wish to interconnect
- line-of-sight to the other radio location with adequate clearance
- location for mounting the antenna SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-3 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.3.2 Line-of-Sight and Path Clearance Guidelines The Tsunami radios will not operate properly unless they have line-of-sight between their corresponding antennas. The Tsunami radio transmission will not pass through trees or other obstacles. Factors to consider include:
- Earth curvature
- Future growth of trees
- Height of buildings In addition to the line-of-sight requirement, a well-engineered path will also have additional path clearance to allow for signal loss due to partial obstructions, atmospheric ducting and ground reflections. To maximize radio reception, 0.6 times the first Fresnel zone should be calculated and this distance added to the path clearance (in addition to trees or buildings). PAGE 3-4 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.3.3 RSL Calculation and Link Budget The received signal level (RSL) can be estimated using the following formula:
RSL (dBm) = Pout - FL1+ G1 + G2 - FL2 - Lp where: Pout is the transmitter output power (in dBm) FL1 is the feeder loss of the transmit side (in dB) G1 is the gain of the transmit antenna (in dB) G2 is the gain of the receive antenna (in dB) FL2 is the feeder loss of the receive side (in dB) Lp is the Path loss, defined by:
Lp (dB) = 96.6 + 20 log10F + 20 log10D where: F = Frequency in GHz (2.4 or 5.8) D = Distance of path in miles This link budget is very important for determining any potential problems during installation. If you have calculated the expected RSL, you can see if it has been achieved during installation, and troubleshoot if necessary. SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-5 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.3.4 Fade Margin Calculation The fade margin is the difference between the actual received signal and the radios threshold. Using the formula provided in Section 3.3.3, the anticipated RSL can be calculated. Compare this RSL to the specified threshold of the Tsunami radio (shown in Section 2.2) and calculate the fade margin as the difference between the two signal levels. 3.3.5 Availability Calculation Availability of the microwave path is a measure of the percent of the time that the link will operate without producing an excessive BER due to multipath fading. In the absence of direct interference, availability is affected by the following:
- Path length
- Fade margin
- Frequency (5.8 GHz in the case of these Tsunami radios)
- Terrain (smooth, average, mountainous)
- Climate (dry, temperate, hot/humid) Depending on the type of traffic carried over the link, the system designer may wish to design for a specific availability. For example, if the data or voice traffic that is carried by the radio is critical then it may be designed for a very high availability (e.g. 99.999% or 5.3 minutes of outage per year). To improve availability, for example, the fade margin can be increased by making the path shorter, or by using higher gain antennas. 1.5'
fade margin reliability 2.0'
fade margin reliability 2.5'
fade margin reliability 4.0'
fade margin reliability 6.0'
fade margin reliability 1 mile 2 miles 3 miles 4 miles 5 miles 10 miles 46 100 50.6 100 54.8 100 62.6 100 69.4 100 40 99.999 44.5 100 48.7 100 56.5 100 63.3 100 36.5 99.999 41 99.999 45.2 99.999 53 100 59.8 100 34 99.999 38.5 99.999 42.7 99.999 50.5 99.999 57.3 100 N/R N/R 36.5 99.999 40.8 99.999 48.6 99.999 55.4 99.999 N/R 34.8 99.999 42.6 99.999 49.4 99.999 Table 3-A: Fade Margin & Availability Calculations PAGE 3-6 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.3.6 Power Supply Planning The Tsunami radio must have access to a supply of appropriate DC power. The Tsunami can be powered from a DC battery system, or from a solar or generator power plant, usually with battery reserves. Typically either a positive or negative 48 volt supply is used. For DC, be sure the cable is of sufficient gauge to carry the necessary current and it is less than three (3) meters (9.75 feet) in length. Before installing the radio, plan for the continuous power consumption needs in accordance with the specifications given in Section 2.2 of this manual. It is also wise to plan for backup power for critical communication circuits (including the Tsunami radio). Backup power allows the radios and associated equipment to continue operation when primary power is interrupted. 3.3.7 Antenna Planning Using path planning mathematics, proper antenna size can be determined which will yield the desired path performance. In general, the larger the antenna that is used with the Tsunami radio, the better the link will perform. Larger antennas have narrower beamwidth and higher gain, which will yield better link performance (higher fade margin, better availability) and improve immunity to interference (due to the smaller beamwidths). However, larger antennas are more costly to purchase and install than smaller antennas, in some cases requiring special equipment for installation. All of these factors should be taken into consideration when selecting antennas. In areas where transmitted output power restrictions apply, the use of larger antennas will maintain the benefit of narrow beamwidths and receive gain. However, output power may need to be reduced to meet regulations. (See Section 3.13.1) Prior to installation, the specific antenna location and mounting should be determined. This advanced planning also yields the transmission line requirements. Only dual-band/dual-polarized directional antennas can be used with these Tsunami radios. SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-7 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.4 Tools Required The following tools may be required for the installation of the Tsunami radios:
- Phillips (cross tip) screwdrivers (for 19-inch rack mounting and attachment of brackets)
- Small blade standard screwdriver (for power supply connector and RF output power adjust)
- Soldering iron (if using any D-type connectors)
- Wire strippers (for removing insulation from power supply and other wiring)
- Wire crimpers (if using any RJ-style connectors that are not pre-made)
- Digital Voltmeter (to measure RSL, Tx output power, Alarms) The following tools are recommended for the installation of the Tsunami radios:
- RF power meter (to measure transmitter output power)
- Cellular phone or two-way radio (for talking with far-end crew and tower crew)
- Bit Error Rate test set (to test link after installation)
- Computer (for NMS access with 10BaseT interface and cable)
- Touch-tone Telephone* (to test orderwire circuits and for communication with far-end) Additional tools will likely be needed for antenna and transmission line installation and antenna alignment. Consult Sections 3.8 through 3.10 of this manual for more details.
*Telephone connection specifications:
REN (Ringer Equivalency Number) DTMF tones Ringing Voltage
(Ringing voltage is adequate for modern solid state ringers, NOT for the older mechanical type ringers) 1.0 B within 1.5% of nominal freq. 48 VDC, typical PAGE 3-8 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.6 Mounting the Tsunami Radio The Tsunami radio can be mounted at any height in a standard 19-inch rack. Blank rack-mounting spaces above and below the Tsunami are recommended, especially if the surrounding equipment dissipates a considerable amount of heat. The Tsunami radio may be set up for mounting with the front edge projecting from the front face of a standard 19-inch rack using the rack mounting brackets enclosed with the screws in the Accessory Kit
(4 per bracket). The rack mounting brackets may be reversed, in order to install for flush or cabinet mounting if preferred. Depending on rack configuration, it may be necessary to remove the four adhesive backed rubber feet on the bottom of the unit. The Tsunami radio has internal fans which intake and exhaust on the left and right sides of the chassis. When rack mounting, it is important to leave a small gap between the outer edges of the radio and the inside edge of the rack. The Tsunami radio may alternatively be placed on a table or shelf attached to a wall. Because of the low weight of the Tsunami, any mounting option other than rack mounting will be less secure. The ODU is mounted on a substantial mounting pole (minimum 2.5 inches) to accommodate the supplied mounting bracket. Figure 3-1: IDU and ODU Overview SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-9 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Figure 3-2: ODU mount with Antenna Detail PAGE 3-10 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.7 Power Connection and Wiring There is no ON/OFF switch on the Tsunami. As soon as power is applied, the equipment will be operational. This means that there can be up to 1W of RF power present at the antenna port. The antenna port should be terminated before power is applied. Power is connected using the DC power plug contained in the Accessory Kit. Use Table 3-B or 3-C along with the associated diagram of Figure 3-3 or 3-4 to connect the DC power cables. For example, for a negative DC power input, use Table 3-B and Figure 3-4. NEGATIVE DC POWER INPUT
(20 TO 63 VDC) PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 FUNCTION Power (DC) Ground (see figure 3-1) Return (+DC) Return (+DC) Ground (see figure 3-1) Power (DC) Table 3-B: DC Power Connection for Negative Supply POSITIVE DC POWER INPUT
(+20 TO +63 VDC) PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 FUNCTION Return (DC) Ground (see figure 3-2) Power (+DC) Power (+DC) Ground (see figure 3-2) Return (DC) Table 3-C: DC Power Connection for Positive Supply Pins 1 and 6 are connected together on the motherboard. Either pin may be used to apply (-DC) DC power input. Similarly, pins 3 and 4 are connected together on the motherboard and may be used to apply (+DC) DC power input. For DC power return connection, connect to the opposite voltage
(either the -DC or the +DC Pin) and connect the return to ground at the DC power plug on pins 2 and/or 5. SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-11 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.7.1 DC Power Wiring Connect the power cable with adequate current rating (minimum of 20 AWG) to the terminals shown on the removed (not plugged into the radio) DC power plug using the screw connections. The recommended minimum current rating of external fuses and cables is 5 Amps. The Tsunami radios consume less than 4 Amps at 48V. Be sure the DC power cable is less than 3 meters (9.75 feet) in length. Each Tsunami terminal should be externally fused separately with a 8 Amp maximum fuse. The DC power cable must be less than three (3) meters in length. If using negative power, connect the negative voltage to pins 1 or 6. Connect the ground return connection to pins 3 or 4. See Figure 3-3. If using positive power, connect the positive voltage to pins 3 or 4. Connect the ground return connection to pins 1 or 6. See Figure 3-4. The ground connection is available at pins 2 and 5. Either pin may be used to ground the return side of the power supply. Do not ground both sides of the power supply. Proper grounding, either through the chassis and/or the power supply, can be very important for protection from lightning. A grounding screw hole is provided on the rear panel. The ground connection may be left floating if the power supply is referenced to ground externally and to avoid ground loops in some configurations. However, this may not provide adequate grounding for lightning protection. Use a DVM (digital voltmeter) to verify voltage and polarity on the DC power plug. Do not connect the DC power plug to the rear of the Tsunami terminal until a load is connected to the antenna port (either an RF pad, or an RF cable and antenna). PAGE 3-12 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Figure 3-3: Negative Voltage DC Connection Figure 3-4: Positive Voltage DC Connection Make sure that when connecting the mating plug that it is properly oriented (terminal screws pointing up) and securely fastened. SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-13 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.7.2 AC Power Connection Not available with this product Figure 3-5:
PAGE 3-14 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.8 Antenna Installation & Alignment INSTALLER CAUTION: Antennas used for this device must be fix-mounted on permanent outdoor structures to provide 5 meter or more separation from all persons during device operation to comply with FCC and other regulatory RF Exposure requirements. Installers should contact the manufacturer for applicable antenna gain and type restrictions to ensure compliance. The antenna installation consists of permanently mounting the antenna and then attaching the ODU mounting plate and then the ODU itself to the mount. The antenna and ODU assembly must be mounted outdoors on a tower, building roof, or other location that provides line-of-sight path clearance to the far-end location. In general, antennas smaller than 1.5 feet diameter are not recommended for urban. Antennas should be ordered with the suitable mounting kit specific to the site requirements. The antenna must be very rigidly mounted, with adequate room for azimuth and elevation adjustment from the rear. The antenna polarization must be the same at both ends of the link, either vertical or horizontal. The mounting kit includes the details on how to mount and adjust azimuth and tilt. Here, the details on how to mount the adapter plate and ODU are described. In general, antenna mountings require a support pipe to which upper and lower support brackets are attached with U bolts. The antenna and optional elevation and azimuth adjustment rods are then mounted onto the support brackets. The whole structure must be adequately grounded for lightning protection. The antenna system must always be installed according to the manufacturers instructions. Unless special test equipment is available, two operating Tsunami radios are required to align the antennas. The antenna is coarse aligned using visual sighting and then fine aligned using the receive signal level (RSL) voltage of the Tsunami. See figure 3-8. The RSL voltage reading can still be used to peak antennas even if the radios have not synchronized, however far-end RSL cannot be measured from the near-end terminal until radios are synchronized. SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-15 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.8.1 Mounting plate to pole mounting assembly:
Refer to the diagram below-
Figure 3-6: ODU Mounting PAGE 3-16 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 After attaching the antenna assembly per their enclosed instructions, attach the mounting plate as shown in Figures 3-2, 3-6 and/or 3-7 below. After attaching the mounting plate, use the antenna in either the horizontal or vertical polarization position (remember, both ends of the link MUST use the same polarization). Note: the A and B feed coax cables must be used for horizontal or vertical polarization with the ODU. After mounting the antenna, attach the dual coax cables that connects the ODU with the IDU. Figure 3-7: IDU and ODU Dual Coaxial Connections SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-17 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.8.2 Course Antenna Alignment To coarse-align the antenna, first set it for flat elevation (no up or down tilt) using a spirit level. Then point it at a heading marker obtained using a compass/GPS (magnetic corrected) back-bearing from an adjacent location, (ideally, 100 feet or more away from the antenna). If a heading marker cannot be set sufficiently far away (for example when on a city building roof or looking through a window) then a rough azimuth setting can be obtained by sighting along the antenna feed. It should be verified that both antennas are on the same polarization by using the manufacturers instructions. Otherwise the RSL will be approximately 25 to 30 dB below the calculated level. Most antennas will also need fine alignment obtained using an operating link because it is very important to maximize the receive RF signal level at each end of the radio link. Read Section 3.7 before applying DC power to the Tsunami radio. Once the coarse alignment has been set-up at both ends, then the link can be powered and some level of reliable communication established. The voltage at the Tsunami ODU RSL test point (BNC connector) should be measured with a DVM to determine the relative receive RF signal level. For the fine alignment, adjusting first the azimuth and then the elevation of the local antenna will maximize the RSL voltage. Then, the far antenna is aligned in the same way, using the RSL voltage of its local Tsunami radio ODU. When aligning antennas it may be convenient to allow direct visiblity to the technicians aligning the antenna. An orderwire telephone will provide end-to-end voice communications once radios are synchronized. Synchronization usually can be accomplished by coarse alignment only. After synchronization, the orderwire phones can be used to communicate between radio sites for antenna fine alignment. The phone interconnect cable can be extended to the antenna when desired. The larger the antenna size, the more critical alignment becomes: for example, with a 2 foot dish, the antenna can be moved 3 degrees off the correct heading before the receive signal level drops by 3 dB. This compares with a 6-foot dish which may only be moved 1 degree for the same degradation. The graph shown in Figure 3-8 shows the typical variation of RSL voltage as the receive signal level is increased from threshold to a higher level. There is some variation between Tsunami receivers, but an approximate estimate of the potential RSL value may be made using this figure. Use the Factory Test Data Sheet shipped with your Tsunami terminal to obtain the best estimate of your RSL. PAGE 3-18 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Above 0 dBm RSL, the receiver may produce errors: however this level is rarely likely to be exceeded. A link budget calculation should be made to calculate the anticipated RSL as described in Section 3.3.3. During anomalous propagation conditions, the RSL may fade but will not increase up more than 10 dB (except in unusual very long paths which may fade up by 15 dB). If in the the RSL link budget. Antenna alignment should enable the RSL to be peaked to the level calculated is approximately 20 dB below the calculated level, then it is likely that the antennas are aligned on a sidelobe of the antenna's radiated signal. In this case, the antennas should be rotated in a wide arc until the main lobe is located. (Other possible causes of low RSL are path obstructions, loss in connectors, adapters and pigtail jumper cables or different antenna polarization at each end of the link.) is peaked but Tsunami Gigabit Models Volts 1.00 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.60 0.50 0.40 0.30 0.20 0.10 0.00
-80
-75
-70
-65
-60 RSL (dB)
-55
-50
-45
-40 Figure 3-8: Typical RSL Voltage versus Received Signal Level (RSL) SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-19 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.9 Ethernet Interface Connection The radio links 1000BaseF interface connection to the Tsunami radio is on the front panel. Additional external lightning protection devices are recommended for the connections if the radio is installed in an area prone to lightning. Use only PolyPhaser or equivalent protectors that are rated for at least 2000MHz and pass DC current (non DC blocking type). The 1000BaseF connection to the Tsunami is at the data interface on the front of the shelf. PAGE 3-20 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.10 System Turn-up to Service 1. Prior to installing the system, it may be desirable to perform a back-to-back test of the Tsunami radio pair. Consult Section 4.9 for further details. Back-to-back testing is a simple way to verify that the Tsunami radios are fully operational before they are installed. Installation adds several variables (such as antenna alignment) which can lead to system turn-up delays. Also, during back-to-back testing, the DIP switch settings and some connections can be tested. This step can eliminate a majority of troubleshooting once the radios are installed. A cellular phone or two-way radio system (walkie talkie, CB, mobile radio) can be very useful during installation. These can be used for temporary near-end and far-end communications between the installation personnel at one site and installation personnel at the other site while installing the system. These can also be helpful for communication between a person at the top of a very tall tower and ground personnel. The Tsunami radio incorporates an internal Orderwire feature that provides end-to-end telephone style communications. However, the link must be partially operational to use this feature. In lieu of, or in addition to the use of cellular phones or two-way radio, this Orderwire feature can also be very useful for installation, but typically cannot be put into service until step 8 or 9 of this procedure is completed. See Section 3.14.1 for more details. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Perform a general alignment of the antennas on both ends of the path using binoculars, compass or other related tools. It is important to have the antennas aligned as accurately as possible before putting radio traffic over the link. This will help in getting the system running more rapidly. See Section 3.10 for more details. Connect the transmission line to the antenna, and feed it to the Tsunami radio location (see Section 3.9). Connect the opposite end of the transmission line to the N-type female connector located on the filter assembly which occupies the top half of the Tsunami rear panel. The connection must be terminated into an antenna or a load before DC power is applied to the radio. Verify that the same channel plan (e.g. A, B) as the near-end radio, and the opposite Tx and Rx frequencies (e.g. A1 and A2 make up a matched pair of radios). With the DC power source active, but not plugged into the Tsunami radio, using a voltmeter, confirm that the DC mating connector has the proper power connections in accordance with Section 3.7. Verify the polarity and the absolute voltage on all pins. Verify ground connection for power. Connect power to the Tsunami radio. Verify that the Front Panel ON LED indication is illuminated. This confirms that power has been properly applied. Ensure that the RF Antenna port connection is properly terminated before applying power to the Tsunami terminal, as in step 3. SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-21 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 When the Tsunami radio is initially powered-on, some alarm conditions may be present. This is normal and alarms can be ignored at this time. The Tsunami radio requires professional installation. With some Tsunami models, in certain countries, there may be Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) limits which dictate the maximum output power that the Tsunami radio can transmit given the transmission line loss and the gain of the antenna. Consult with appropriate government agencies or Western Multiplex if there is any question regarding maximum output power allowed. Do not adjust output power above factory settings. 7. Connect a voltmeter to the ODUs test points (BNC connection). This voltage reading corresponds to the Received Signal Level (RSL) of the near-end radio. In other words, RSL is the amount of signal the near-end radio is receiving from the far-end radio. Since the antennas have not been finely aligned, it is not expected at this time that the RSL will read very high. However, at this point it can be verified that some communication is taking place between the two Tsunami terminals. Use the RSL voltage reading to align the antennas. Align one antenna at a time in accordance with Section 3.10. Complete alignment of both ends of the radio link before going further. The RSL voltage output on the radio's front panel will output a voltage over the usable range of the radio. Refer to Figure 3-8 in Section 3.8.2. RSL of both ends should be verified to be within approximately 2 dB of predicted value (see Section 3.3.3). There are several factors that can contribute to low RSL:
- Incorrect antenna alignment (aligned on a lobe and not on the main signal)
- Improper polarization alignment of antennas (horizontal vs. vertical)
- Transmission line problems (loose connections, bent or damaged cables, lossy adapters)
- Path obstructions (trees, buildings, hills, etc.)
- Path clearance (line-of-sight, earth curvature, Fresnel zone, diffraction and partial obstruction)
- Weather (inversion layers, ducting and multipath)
- Antenna feed (coaxial/connector) problem PAGE 3-22 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 The Tsunami radio requires professional installation. Dont forget that the transmitter output power adjustment on the Tsunami radio effects the RSL. Depending on EIRP limits (if any), path distance, and antenna gain, you may need to adjust the output transmit power to the proper level before putting the radios in service. If radio synchronization has been established, the radio link may be able to provide some limited communications over the link. It can be helpful to establish voice communications from one end of the radio link to the other using the Orderwire feature of the Tsunami radio. See Section 3.14.1 for details. If RSL is lower than anticipated, recheck the path clearance and transmission line as these are the typical causes of low RSL. Radio operations can be verified by connecting radios back-to-back with attenuators (40-60 dB), (see Section 4.9). If the problem remains, consult Section 4 of this manual for troubleshooting techniques which will help determine the source of the problem. 8. 9. Once radio performance is verified and acceptable, the Tsunami radios can now be put into service with the intended Gigabit Ethernet traffic. Connect to the LAN or computer using the SC (fiber) 1000BaseF connector. With Ethernet traffic applied in both directions, all front panel LEDs, except for POWER and the data TXD/RXD lights should be off. If any other LEDs are on, consult the trouble shooting sections of this manual. Now that the link is operational, other services can be connected including T1 (DSX-1), Orderwire, Diagnostics, Alarms and Aux Data (Service Channel). Consult Section 3.14 for details on these connections. SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-23 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.11 Additional Connections There are additional customer connections which are optional and are not required to make the Tsunami operational but may prove useful. 3.11.1 Orderwire Connection Orderwire is a telephone type wayside service which allows users of the Tsunami radio to establish voice communications from one radio to another, either directly to the companion far-end, or through a repeater configuration, or several repeater configurations. Telephone connection specifications:
REN (Ringer Equivalency Number) DTMF tones Ringing Voltage
(Ringing voltage is adequate for modern solid state ringers, NOT for the older mechanical type ringers) 1.0 B within 1.5% of nominal freq. 48 VDC, typical This Orderwire service does not affect the normal radio transmission of traffic. Refer to Section 2.3.5 for the telephone specifications. For simple near-end to far-end communications, follow the steps below:
1. 2. 4. Using a standard RJ-11 telephone cable, connect a standard electronic telephone (a touch tone phone, complete with dialer; a handset by itself will not work) to the Orderwire connector on the Tsunami front panel. This connector is wired identically to a standard two-wire telephone jack, see Figure 3-9 for details. With a telephone connected to each Tsunami terminal on opposite ends of the link, either telephone can be used to dial-up the far-end location. The far-end terminals internal ringer and the connected telephone will ring, and if answered, two-way full-duplex voice communication is established. If using the Orderwire or Network management functions, all Tsunami radios connected must have unique address settings
(telephone numbers). If the Tsunami radios are connected in a repeater configuration, Orderwire services can be established to all Tsunami terminals in the network by implementing a connection of their rear-
panel connectors between repeater terminals. At the repeater site, a cable can be connected to the two Tsunami terminals between their rear panel VF 9-pin connectors as shown in Figure 3-6. With this cable in place, the Orderwire function will operate at terminals at each end of the repeater and at the repeater site. This function can be continued through several repeater sites if desired. For hub connections of 3 or more Tsunami radios at the same site, an external 4-wire bridge is required to connect all radios to the orderwire. The orderwire system can be integrated with orderwire equipment supported by many other vendors. If your existing orderwire PAGE 3-24 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 network uses 2 digit addressing, and 0 dBm VF interface, it can be connected to a Tsunami as shown in Figure 3-9. Dialing a V (star key) on the orderwire telephone implements an all call feature which rings all connected radios. Also, if a phone anywhere in the connected network has accidentally been left off-hook, the # (pound key) key can be used to mute all off-hook handsets until they are placed on and off hook again. The orderwire operates telephones provide communication to all other telephones in the connected network. Even if a particular telephone does not ring, it can still be used to talk and listen to any ongoing orderwire activity if the orderwire is in use at other terminal locations. line. All like a party Orderwire Connection VF Port Connection Figure 3-9: Orderwire & VF Port Connection SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-25 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.11.2 Alarm Connections External alarm outputs are provided at the 9-pin, D-type subminiature ALARM connector. There are two Form C summary alarm relays capable of switching 30 VDC at 1 A. See Table 3-D and Figure 3-
10 for Alarm Connections. The summary alarm (Form C relay) is activated by any near-end front panel LED alarm condition, including if the internal test mode is enabled. The out-of-service summary alarm (Form C relay) is activated by any of the following alarm conditions:
v v v RF LINK Radio Fail Internal Test Figure 3-10: Pin Connections, ALARM Interface PAGE 3-26 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 PIN 1 NO, SUMMARY ALARM, FORM C - normally open connection on summary alarm relay. Closed when in alarm. PIN 4 PIN 6 C, SUMMARY ALARM, FORM C - common connection on the summary alarm relay. PIN 9 PIN 2 NC, SUMMARY ALARM, FORM C - normally closed connection on summary alarm relay. PIN 5 NO, OUT OF SERVICE SUMMARY ALARM, FORM C - normally open connection on out-of-
service summary alarm relay. Closed when in alarm. C, OUT OF SERVICE SUMMARY ALARM, FORM C - common connection for the out-of-
service summary alarm relay. NC, OUT OF SERVICE SUMMARY ALARM, FORM C - normally closed connection on out-of-
service summary alarm relay. Open when in alarm. PIN 7 RSL output DC voltage referenced to pin 3 PIN 8 Tx Power output DC voltage referenced to pin 3 Table 3-D: Alarm Interface Connections All alarms are active for a minimum of one second, or as long as the alarm condition persists, which ever is longer. SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-27 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.11.3 Configuration (Diagnostic) Port Operation The Config Port is used to retrieve diagnostic information and to configure additional features within the Tsunami radios by means of a computer connection via SERIAL interface. Also can be used as an RS-232 port to download the latest revision radio operation software. The config port allows connection of RS-232 devices to receive status of the Tsunami radio and provide configuration. For RS-232 diagnostics connection (Section 4.11) to the Tsunami radio, connect the serial device
(modem, computer, terminal) to the male 9-pin subminiature connector in accordance with Figure 3-
11. Figure 3-11: RS-232 Config Port Connections Pins 6 through 9 must not be connected for RS-232 communications to operate properly. PAGE 3-28 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.11.4 AUX DATA (Digital Service Channel) Connection The AUX DATA port is a separate wayside serial port which can be configured to allow the connection of any user serial data (to 9600 baud) through the radio network. Connection to the AUX DATA port is an RS-232 serial interface, identical to the config port (see Section 3.14.3). This port does not affect the Ethernet traffic on the Tsunami radio. SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-29 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 3.11.5 T1 (DSX-1) Interface Connection The Tsunami radio also provides four wayside T1 connections. These connections allows for standard DSX-1 connect of voice circuits without affecting the Ethernet traffic. A standard RJ-48c connector is provided for this connection. 3.11.6 CEPT-1 (E1) InterfaceConnection Not provided with this model at this time 3.11.7 NMS Interface Connection The NMS connection provides connection for the network management system. This allows an HTML interface to the Tsunami radio for purposes of monitoring, configuration and security settings. This connection is an RJ-45 style connection and complies to standard 100BaseT or F interface. Typically, the installer or manager will connect to the NMS with a stand-alone computer to initially configure the radio prior to installation. If IP addresses and security are set properly, the connection can also be used as an out-of-band connection for radio management. Alternatively, if the 100BaseT/F is connected to a network, or combined with the 100BaseT traffic on the link, via an external 10/100 switch, hub or router, full wireless NMS can be achieved for all radios in the network. The factory default IP address is set to 10.0.0.1. To reset the radio back to the factory default, Hold down the far-end test button while powering up the radio. Release the switch after 6 seconds. More details on the NMS connection can be found in Section 4 of this manual. In the future, this connection will also allow NMS via SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) in addition to the HTML interface that is presently supplied. Consult factory for details or assistance with NMS connections, if required. Ethernet Cable:Straight version to hub/switch, crossed version direct to PC. Pins:1=Tx+, 2=Tx-, 3=Rx+ & 6=Rx PAGE 3-30 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Your Notes on the Tsunami Radio SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-31 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4. Troubleshooting 4.1 Regular Maintenance The Tsunami radios do not require any regular maintenance, however, it is prudent to monitor the radio link at regular intervals to assure that the link conditions are not changing. When visiting a radio site for maintenance, the following items may be checked and their results recorded:
v RSL Voltage v PWR Voltage v Far-end RSL Voltage v Alarm conditions v Verify radio has adequate ventilation v Verify security ID is set the same at each radio through NMS If any alarm conditions exist, they should be recorded, and troubleshooting procedures from this Section of the manual should be followed. SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-1 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4.2 Technical Support Western Multiplex provides 24-hour telephone technical support for installed Tsunami radios. Customers are encouraged to troubleshoot the radio and link in accordance with the latter part of this section in this manual before contacting Western Multiplex. Western Multiplex also has a limited supply of Tsunami radios that can be loaned to out-of-service customers for installation while units are being repaired. Loaner supply is limited, and is only used for critical applications on a first-come, first-served basis. Customer service #:
+1 408 542-5390 PAGE 4-2 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4.3 Repair Policy The Tsunami terminal includes comprehensive alarm indicators designed to diagnose potential faults. Should a fault occur, it often may be resolved by operator adjustment. Should a fault occur that cannot be resolved by operator adjustment and has been confirmed by looping terminals together on the bench (See Section 4.7), then the equipment should be returned to the factory for repair. The Tsunami radio is a complex system not designed for user repair. Do not remove the cover or open any part of the Tsunami terminal. The complete Tsunami terminal should be sent back in its original packing material for factory repair. Please contact the factory in advance of returning the product. You will be assigned a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number that authorizes your return. Units sent to the factory without an RMA number may be delayed in the processing of the repair. Be sure to include the following information:
v RMA number v description of the problem v your name and telephone number v return shipping address v urgency of repair Please refer to the published Warranty policy for repair policy details. Tsunami radios should be packaged in their original packing boxes for shipment whenever possible Western Multiplex can provide an empty box shipment to facilitate proper packaging. Regardless, proper and adequate packaging must be used for shipments to protect the radio(s) from damage. Western Multiplex can not be held responsible for any repairs due to inadequately packed materials. Damage caused by improper packing will likely result in higher repair costs and delays (refer to the Warranty section at the beginning of this manual). SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-3 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4.4 Front Panel Status LEDs There are several front panel status LEDs on the Tsunami radio. These LEDs indicate conditions where either a hardware failure has occurred or the radio link is not optimum. In many cases, a combination of LEDs may be illuminated. The following sections describe the necessary troubleshooting procedures should any LED(s) indicate a problem during or after installation. IDU Cable ODU Radio Fail RF Link TXD RXD COLL Green = Indoor Unit OK Red = Indoor Unit detected hardware failure Green = ODU Cable OK Red = ODU Cable shorted Green = Outdoor Unit OK Red = Outdoor Unit detected hardware failure Green = Radio hardware OK Red = Hardware failure detected Green = Error-free operation Yellow = Bit errors occurring Red = Excessive bit errors or radio link failure Flashing = Link ID mismatched Green = 100BaseT data transmit present Yellow = 100BaseT port connected (no data present) Off = No 100BaseT connection detected Green = 100BaseT data receive present Yellow = 100BaseT port connected (no data present) Off = No 100BaseT connection detected Yellow = Collisions occurring on 100BaseT (half-duplex mode) FAR END Red = Alarm(s) present on the far-end radio**
NMS (10BaseT) Green = Tx or Rx data present on the NMS interface Yellow = NMS interface connected (no data present) Off = No NMS interface connection detected T1 INPUT Green = Alarm enabled and T1 connection detected Red = Alarm enabled and no T1 connection detected Yellow = Alarm disabled and T1 connection detected Off = Alarm disabled and no T1 connection detected
** Radio Fail, RF Link (yellow or red), T1 Input (yellow or red) PAGE 4-4 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4.4.1 RF LINK Alarm Function:
This LED indicates that the demodulator function is not synchronizing with the intended received signal. Possible Causes:
v Severe path fading due to atmospheric conditions, usually accompanied by low RSL voltage reading v Poor transmission line connections usually accompanied by low RSL voltage reading v Antenna problems, misalignment, or path clearance usually accompanied by low RSL voltage reading v Improper radio settings (e.g. frequency channel) v Received signal level (RSL) is too strong v Interference v Far-End radio transmitter circuitry is faulty v Near-End radio receiver circuitry is faulty v Link security ID not the same for each radio Recommended Actions:
Check the following at each end of the link:
v Verify that rear panel filters are opposite channel plans on each end (e.g. one is A1 and other is A2). v Verify that radio frequency settings match each installed filter (in NMS menus). v Verify that all connections between radios and antennas are secure and all devices between radios and antennas are rated for the radio frequency band (5.3/5.8 GHz). Measure RSL by placing a voltmeter across RSL and GND test points. Compare this voltage to the Factory Test Data Sheet and estimate the RSL in dBm. Compare this to the RSL that was expected using path calculations (see Section 3.3.3). Press and hold the DISPLAY FAR END button and measure the far-end RSL (while continuing to hold the button). Compare this RSL to the Factory Test Data Sheet for the far-end radio and estimate the RSL in dBm. Again, compare this RSL to the expected RSL from the link budget calculations. If RSL from both ends of the radio are approximately the same as each other, but lower than anticipated for this installation, then the likely cause of the BER alarm(s) is excessive losses between the radios. Excessive loss problems could include the transmission line at either end, all adapters, connectors, the antennas, the antenna alignment as well as the path itself (any obstructions or clearance problems). Antenna alignment, line-of-sight and path clearance should be verified; if this does not improve RSL, all devices between the radios and their antennas at both ends should be checked. Make sure all transmission line, connectors and any other devices are properly rated for operation at the radio's frequency (5.3/5.8 GHz). SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-5 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 If only one end has low RSL, this could be caused by low transmit output power from the opposite end radio. Verify that the transmitter output power of the radio opposite to the low RSL receiver has been set in accordance to path calculations, or EIRP restrictions (where applicable). Power adjustment must be performed by professional installation personnel only. The PWR test point can be used and compared with the Factory Test Data Sheet, the front panel recessed potentiometer can be turned clockwise to increase power. If an RF power meter is available, this can be connected to the RF output of the radio for precision measurement. This test will also verify that the radio transmitter is working properly. If one terminal (or both) has high RSL, this could be caused by a very short path or interference. To verify the possible presence of interference, remove DC power to the radio which is opposite to the one that is reading high RSL. Once power is removed, measure RSL on the remaining radio. If RSL voltage is lower than that which is listed for "Threshold" in the Factory Test Data Sheet, then an interfering signal is present. If interference is suspected, the easiest potential remedy is to swap frequency channels on both sides of the link. See Section 4.2 for details. Swap terminals at both ends of the link so that they are the opposite from their original installation. After both ends are moved, reconnect the radios and determine if the BER alarm is still active. If the BER alarm is still active, other frequency channels can be installed, or other interference countermeasures can be tried, in accordance with Section 4.8. If all path related and data input problems have been pursued and the BER alarm is still active, the problem could be related to a radio failure. While radio failure is typically indicated by more severe alarm conditions, it is possible that one of the radios may be out of specification, and this could be the cause of the BER alarm. A back-to-back test will verify proper radio operation. See Section 4.9 for details. A threshold test on both radios along with a test to verify proper RF output power would be beneficial. Perform a back-to-back test before returning any radio terminal to the factory for repair. A back-to-back test verifies radio operation.
(See Section 4.7). If the radios successfully pass their back-to-back testing, the problem is likely with the path or the connections between the radio and the antenna or interference. Before reinstalling the radios, be sure to set the output power to the appropriate level for the installation. PAGE 4-6 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4.4.2 RADIO FAIL Alarm Function:
The RADIO FAIL alarm indicates a known problem with the radio hardware. Possible Causes:
v Internal synthesizers are unlocked v Internal digital circuits have failed Recommended Actions:
1. Remove power from the unit. 2. Check to make sure power supply voltages are within specification. 3. Even if the voltages were within specification, reapply power to the unit. 4. If RADIO FAIL alarm clears, place the radio back into service. 5. If RADIO FAIL alarm does not clear, perform a back-to-back test to verify radio operation, as described in Section 4.7. 6. If RADIO FAIL alarm is still active in a back-to-back test, return the radio to the factory for repair (see Section 4.3). SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-7 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4.4.3 FAR END Alarm Function:
This LED indicates that there is an alarm condition present on the far-end radio. When the DISPLAY FAR END button is pressed (and held), the status LEDs indicate the alarm conditions of the far-end radio. Possible Cause:
v One or more alarm condition(s) exist on the far-end radio Recommended Actions:
1. Press and hold the DISPLAY FAR END button and observe the LED status. 2. Follow instructions for troubleshooting the far-end radio in accordance to the appropriate LEDs which are in alarm, as described in Section 4.6.1. PAGE 4-8 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4.5 Errors in the Data Stream When the radio is in service, errors in the data stream may occur. This is usually known to the operator by either faulty data indications of downstream equipment or external bit error rate testing. It is possible that no alarms appear on the front panel during normal operations, but there are errors present in the data stream. Some errors will not result in no alarm (such as bipolar violations, slow "dribbling" errors, improperly terminated connections or incorrect settings), but will be exhibited on downstream data processing equipment or during a BER test. In other cases, there may be data errors due to atmospheric conditions (fading), interference or other reasons, but not at a high enough error level to be indicated with the BER alarm LED. In the case of these types of errors, the following information can be helpful to troubleshoot the radio link. Indications:
v During external BER test, test equipment indicates errors v Downstream equipment (mux, channel bank, CODEC, router, etc.) indicates errors Possible Causes:
v Path fading due to atmospheric conditions v Poor transmission line connections v Antenna problems, misalignment or path clearance v Received signal level (RSL) is too strong v Far-End radio transmitter circuitry is faulty v Near-End radio receiver circuitry is faulty v Interference Recommended Actions:
1. Verify 1000BaseF fiber connection and cable. 2. Follow the instructions described in Section 4.4.1 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-9 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4.6 Back-to-Back Testing Back-to-back testing, as shown in Figure 4-1, is an ideal method of testing the Tsunami radios. This testing eliminates link problems caused by auxiliary equipment, installation, or the radio path and isolates potential radio hardware problems. Back-to-back testing must be performed with both radios at the same location. The following test equipment is required:
v DC power source capable of supplying approximately 250 Watts (total) to the radios. v Two coax couplings and 70dB loss attenuation per cable. v BER tester Back-to-back testing must be performed to verify a radio problem before returning any radio to the factory for repair. Use two coax cables and approximately 70dB attenuation per cable When the equipment is connected as shown in Figure 4-1, both Tsunami radios should have no alarm conditions. If these conditions have been met, then it is likely that the Tsunami radio is operating in accordance to specifications. If errors or alarms occur during this test, verify that all configuration settings are properly set. If alarms or errors are still present, the radio is likely to be faulty. PAGE 4-10 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Figure 4-1: Back-to-Back Test Configuration The Tsunami radios will be damaged if appropriate attenuation is not supplied between radios. You must provide a minimum of 40 dB and no more than 80 dB attenuation between the two radios. Use this attenuation in EACH of the two connection cables!
SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-11 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4.7 LINK Testing Link testing is the preferred way to evaluate a radio links performance. It can be performed from end-to-end or in link test mode (which tests both directions of the radio path). Figure 4-2 illustrates a typical test configuration (which may include the radios path instead of in-line attenuators). Figure 4-2 illustrates a typical test configuration for end-to-end testing. When performing testing, make sure of the following:
- Disconnect all 1000BaseF inputs and outputs to both radios.
- Verify all configuration settings. Link testing may be performed on the bench, with two terminals back to back, or over the radio path. Also, it may be performed from end-to-end (which requires two 1000BaseF test sets over a link, the far-end unit slaved to the near-end units clock) or in loopback mode) If link testing indicates an unacceptable level of errors, follow the instructions in Section 4.4.1. or perform a back-to-back test. Tsunami 1000baseF Tester Tsunami 1000baseF Tester Figure 4-2: End-to-End Test Configuration PAGE 4-12 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4.8 Network Management System (NMS) The Tsunami 1000BaseF radio platform provides multiple methods of managing the radio network:
1) 2) 3) 4) SNMP Browser (IE, Netscape, etc.) graphical user interface Software upgrade procedure TelNet (via VT100 session using Windows Hyperlink) 4.8.1 SNMP Use your favorite SNMP access software such as HP OpenView. Please contact customer service/support to get a copy of the MIB file e-mailed to you or from our FTP site. 4.8.2 Browser GUI Use Internet Explorer or Netscape to access the radio by typing in its IP address. If you are setting up the radios for the first time, the default IP address is: 10.0.0.1 You will have to configure your computer to this domain first by setting its address to 10.0.0.5 and then changing the radios IP to one within the domain of your network. After changing one radios IP address (see Configuration tab) change the other radios IP address also, but not to the same address of the previous radio. Reconfigure the IP address of your computer to its original address and then restart the PC so it is now in the same domain as the radios. The browser interface shows a virtual front panel of the radio that is addressed. To view the front panel of the associated far-end radio, click on the window that is located on the virtual front panel
(see following illustrations). Illustrations on the next few pages of this manual provide details on all browser screens and operations. 4.8.3 In-band NMS Set-up Use a 4-port (or larger) 100/1000 switch (recommended as opposed to a hub that will also work) at each radio to operate the NMS in-band with the 100BaseT/F traffic. The NMS port can have a unique domain that is valid only with the PC that is being used for network management and system-wide operational status and will not interfere with 100BaseT/F traffic as the radio's MAC address plus its IP address are unique. Radios are set at the factory to IP addr: 10.0.0.1. Temporally set your PCs domain (write down its present IP address) to a suggested setting of PC=10.0.0.5-the PC will force a re-boot. Re-boot the PC computer attached to the first radio's 100BaseT NMS port and log-in to radio NMS w/favorite browser (IE or Netscape) after log-in (manager:manager). Change the IP address
(Configuration) to an unused one in your domain (if you want to also change the password at this time, do this first). Do the same with other radio (may have to reboot computer attached to this other 10.0.0.1 radio as the other's MAC address does not match the MAC/IP address the PC knows about). Set the IP address this radio to a different IP address in your normal operating domain. Set your PC back to its original domain (will force reboot again). This should allow for typical LAN operation. Type http://10.0.0.1/index.htm to gain initial access. SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-13 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Login Screen 1 Enter User Name and Password. If using for the first time or the radio has been reset, use:
Full User Rights:
User Name: manager Password: manager Limited User Rights:
User Name: operator Password: operator Its advisable to change the password setting on the administration (Admin) page to protect radio settings, configuration and illegal entry into the radio system. Login Screen 2 With default Name and Password Click on Log On to gain entry PAGE 4-14 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Device Screen Tsunami model information including software revision versions and product serial number. Configuration 1 The radios characteristics can be modified from this page. The Current column indicates current settings and the New column the radio setting(s) that can be changed. Use the pull-
down menus to select the new setting. Then, click on the Set button to invoke the setting. In some cases it may be necessary to refresh the screen to see changes to settings. Warning: the Tx/Rx Frequency can not be changed without also changing the physical diplexer. SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-15 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Help Screen At any time, on any page, clicking on Help will open a separate help window to facilitate operation of the Browser NMS. Use the help page to provide details on the configuration settings. Use the window close box to dispense with the help screen when finished. Configuration 2 Scroll down to see the complete list of radio configuration settings. Here is where the radios IP setting can be modified from the factory default 10.0.0.1 Note: To return to defaults, power up the radio while depressing the link test button and holding until the LEDs flash RED. PAGE 4-16 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Performance 1 Running data on the operation of the radio link. To reset the historical data, click on History Reset. Note alarm bar between front panel depiction and performance data. Performance 2 New screen after resetting history. SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-17 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Alarms Both near-end and Far-end information on the running status of the link are displayed on this single page. Administration Change the default password (manager or operator) for subsequent entry into the browser NMS. Click on set after changing the password. If you forget the password, you must fully reset the radio by holding in the far-end button on the front of the radio while powering it up. Here is also where the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and SNMP community information is located. PAGE 4-18 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Contact Information The E-mail and the URL links are active text if selected. Each will start your e-mail or browser when either is clicked on. Link failure indication!
If the link is lost, the severely errored seconds will display the amount of time the link was not passing sufficient data (see above). In this example, the near-end radio lost sync with the far-end radio. SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-19 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4.8.2.1 NMS Help screen details:
LEDs IDU Cable ODU Radio Fail RF Link TXD RXD COLL Green = Indoor Unit OK Red = Indoor Unit detected hardware failure Green = ODU Cable OK Red = ODU Cable shorted Green = Outdoor Unit OK Red = Outdoor Unit detected hardware failure Green = Radio hardware OK Red = Hardware failure detected Green = Error-free operation Yellow = Bit errors occurring Red = Excessive bit errors or radio link failure Green = 100BaseT data transmit present Yellow = 100BaseT port connected (no data present) Off = No 100BaseT connection detected Green = 100BaseT data receive present Yellow = 100BaseT port connected (no data present) Off = No 100BaseT connection detected Yellow = Collisions occurring on 100BaseT (half-duplex mode) FAR END Red = Alarm(s) present on the far-end radio**
NMS (10BaseT) Green = Tx or Rx data present on the NMS interface Yellow = NMS interface connected (no data present) Off = No NMS interface connection detected T1 INPUT Green = Alarm enabled and T1 connection detected Red = Alarm enabled and no T1 connection detected Yellow = Alarm disabled and T1 connection detected Off = Alarm disabled and no T1 connection detected
** Radio Fail, RF Link (yellow or red), T1 Input (yellow or red) PAGE 4-20 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Configuration T1 Line Code AMI/B8ZS setting for the T1 interface T1 Line Build Out T1 interface line length setting T1 AIS @BER=10e-3 If selected, automatic injection of 1's into the T1 data stream during RF Link red alarm state T1 Input Alarm If selected, activates alarm on loss of T1 signal T1 Near-end Radio Loopback Activates loopback at the T1 input port of the near-end, towards the far-end of the link T1 Far-end Radio Loopback Activates loopback at the T1 input port of the far-end, towards the near-end of the link Orderwire Address Orderwire telephone address (any 2 digit number 00-99) Link Security Code Security code set by user (any 6 bytes=12 characters) Valid characters are 0-9, A-F only (2 to the 48th codes) Note: Must match code on far-end radio to establish link Example: 3A45EBA27F65 or BDAF3976D2C5 Tx/Rx Frequency Selects Tx and Rx frequencies setting must match installed diplexer filter assembly see manual for details Ethernet Duplex Selects half or full duplex for the 100BaseT interface Learning Filter Enables the ability to acquire and store IP addresses for efficient bridging operation (normally enabled) Fiber Optic Interface Enables the fiber 100BaseT interface Device IP Address Device Subnet Mask SNMP Get Community SNMP Set Community Configure the IP address for the network management Ethernet interface Configure the subnet mask for the network management Ethernet interface Configure the Get community string for the radio's SNMP network management agent Configure the Set community string for the radio's SNMP network management agent SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-21 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Performance Current BER Current estimated RF link bit error rate Current RSL (dBm) Current estimated received signal level, in dBm Errored Seconds Number of seconds that incurred an error since the last reset of the "clear history" function. Indicates errored packets. Severely Errored Seconds Min RSL (dBm) Max RSL (dBm) Number of seconds that incurred errors in excess of BER=10e-6 since the last reset of the "clear history" function Usually indicates total loss of data/packets, not just errors Minimum estimated received signal level (in dBm) measured since the last reset of the "clear history" function Maximum estimated received signal level (in dBm) measured since the last reset of the "clear history" function Elapsed Seconds Since Reset Number of seconds since the last reset of the "clear history"
function Alarms T1 Input T1 Code Violation IF GREEN IF RED T1 Input is present or T1 input alarm is disabled T1 Input is NOT present and T1 input alarm is enabled No T1 code violation error detected T1 code violation error detected T1 Line Driver Line driver is adequate Line driver is in fault condition T1 AIS NOT injecting all 1s Injecting all 1s in data stream Radio Sync Radio link is synchronized Radio link NOT established Bit Error Error-free operation Bit Error Rate worse than 10e-7 Fan 1 Fan 2 Fan 1 is operating correctly Fan 1 is NOT operating correctly Fan 2 is operating correctly Fan 2 is NOT operating correctly Rx Synth Receive synthesizer is locked Receive synthesizer NOT locked PAGE 4-22 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Tx Synth Transmit synthesizer is locked Transmit synthesizer NOT locked ODU PLO Alarm ODU Synth Alarm ODU Phase Lock Loop is locked ODU PLL is not locked ODU Synthesizer is locked ODU Synthesizer is NOT locked ODU Comm ODU is communicating w/IDU ODU NOT communicating w/IDU ODU PWS15V ODU Cable Alarm 15V Power Supply is normal 15V Power Supply is out of range ODU Cable is normal ODU Cable is shorted SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-23 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 4.8.4 Software Update Download Procedure Software download procedure on Tsunami 100 (second release V 2.0):
1) Connect the host PC tot the radio terminal through the NMS 10BaseT port. 2) Point the browser
(For factory default use 10.0.0.1 for the http: address) the radio's Web page "http//xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/upload.htm". to 3) Login as "manager" for name and password on the GUI prompt. 4) Follow the instructions on the screen. a) Enter the file name you want to upload, e.g. (a:ts_nmu.udl software bianary image file), or select the browse button and point to the proper location. b) While the file name is displayed on the screen, select the install button. c) It will display a status child window indicating it is erasing and writing to the unused Bank.. (Note the Bank # for ref.) d) After it is complete, you will see this message "File upload finished and system will reboot! Restart browser to logon again"
e) Now, you can re-enter the upload GUI and insure the new uploaded Bank is valid and is the current Bank in use. Memory Banks:
The radio has two banks of flash memory available, Bank 0 and Bank 1, only one bank will be in use at a time. The radio will automatically utilize the new uploaded bank. In addition, through the procedure, you can also manually select Bank 0 or Bank 1 by selecting the (switch) button. Switching between Banks is quick and you will need to re-start the browser. Also, to determine if a flash memory Bank has any software, you can read the Bank status. E.g. Valid or invalid, invalid indicating that it is an empty memory Bank. PAGE 4-24 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Telnet 4.8.5 Use a standard TELNET session (i.e. Windows monitor. Plug into the radios CONFIGuration port. Hyperlink). Program will emulate a VT100 Set the session to an unused COM port (e.g. COM1) and use 19,200 baud, 8 bits, No parity and One stop bit. Cable is two (2) DB-9F connectors with pins 2-3, 3-2 and 5-5 using 3 conductor wire. To start a session (type what is within the single quotes and then the Enter key):
Hit the PCs CR/Enter key two (2) times after the radio has reinitialized Type 1 and CR/Enter to enter the User Name and then Enter key (factory default=manager) Type 2 and CR/Enter to enter the Password and then the Enter key (factory default=manager) Type a and Enter Key to accept the two entries - you should now see a menu list (a=accept) Any time you wish to go back to a previous screen, type o for out (if an o does not exit from the page you working from, use logout to exit). There are many user changeable functions that may not be present in the browser such as setting the Default Gateway if the radios NMS port is connected through a router. As an example, the following steps can be used to check the radios Network Status:
From the NMU Main Menu, type 3 and Enter. Note the radios IP address, subnet mask, MAC address and other radio parameters. Example 2: Set a Default Gateway:
From the main menu (after logging in), type 11 to get to the VxWorks Shell prompt (->). Type help to get a list of all the advanced commands. Use the Enter key or Q to complete. From the -> prompt, type netHelp to see a list of the network help commands
(Use Enter key or Q to quit/stop). From the -> prompt, type nmuHelp to see a list of the nmu (Network Management Unit) commands (Use Enter key or Q to quit/stop). From the -> prompt, type staticShow to check to see if there is a current Default Gateway already set (if set, you may want to write down the settings for future re-use). Type staticAdd to get to the Default Gateway setup command. Note the example. SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-25 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 You can always type help to get the appropriate help for the area you are accessing. Follow the guidelines to set the Default Gateway command string:
For example: staticAdd 0.0.0.0, 100.0.0.111, 255.255.255.0 Check to confirm that the Default Gateway has been set properly by typing staticShow again When done with the TELNET session, type o or logout until back to the Name-Password entry page you started from. To print a complete list of available functions, type help from a main menu screen and then print the page to your default printer connected to your PC. PAGE 4-26 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Your Notes on the Tsunami Radio SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-27 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 5. Appendices Appendix A - Digital Interface Specifications 1. General Characteristics (Regulatory) 1000baseF (IEEE 802.3u) Fully compliant to Ethernet V.2 Model Manufacturer Frequency Band Identifier Emission Designator Transmitter Power Output Tolerance (%) Baseband Type Signal Maximum Channel Capacity Digital Modulation Rate Digital Modulation Automatic Power Control Receive Threshold at BER = 1 x 10-6 RF Bandwidth Model 27200-G1XX Tsunami 5.3/5.8 GHz 1000BaseF Ethernet Bridge Western Multiplex Corp. 5.3 and 5.8 GHz bands HZB-U5358-1000 UNII 5.3 band: +10 dBm (~15 mW) 5.8 band: +17 dBm (50 mW) 0.001 Digital Both channels 50.791 Mbps 16 QAM or 32 QAM No
-77 dBm 100 MHz each band, both polarizations Table A-1: Regulatory Information 2. Specifications Transmission Medium Signaling Technique Topology LAN Table Filtering Data Rate Delay Buffer Duplex UTP Manchester Star 1,024 addresses (automatic learning and aging) 15,000 pps Up to throughput of particular radio model 2-5 frames 400 packets Full Table A-2: Interconnection Specification SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-1 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Appendix B Networking Q&As Q: What is Ethernet?
A: Ethernet is a type of network cabling and signaling specifications (OSI Model layers 1
[physical] and 2 [data link]) originally developed by Xerox in the late 1970. The IEEE's
(Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) used Ethernet Version 2 as the basis for the 802.3 CSMA/CD network standard. Q: What is an 802.3 network?
A: That's IEEE-ish for Ethernet. Q: What is CSMA/CD?
A: CSMA/CD is the media access control mechanism used by Ethernet and 802.3 networks;
in other words, it determines how a packet of data is placed on the wire. CSMA/CD stands for "Carrier Sense Multiple Access, with Collision Detection". Before an Ethernet device puts a packet "on the wire", it listens to find if another device is already transmitting. Once the device finds the wire is clear, it starts sending the packet while also listening to hear if another device started sending at the same time (which is called a collision). Refer to the Q&A on collisions for more info about this phenomena. Q: What is an OSI Model?
A: The Open Systems Interconnect (OSI) reference model is the ISO (International Standards Organization) structure for the "ideal" network architecture. This Model outlines seven areas, or layers, for the network. These layers are (from highest to lowest):
LAYER 7) Applications: Where the user applications software lies. Such issues as file access and transfer (FTP), virtual terminal emulation, Internet connections (HTTP), inter-
process communication and the like are handled here. 6) Presentation: Differences in data representation are dealt with at this level. For example, UNIX-style line endings (CR only) might be converted to MS-DOS style
(CRLF), or EBCIDIC to ASCII character sets. 5) Session: Communications between applications across a net- work is controlled at the session layer. Testing for out-of-sequence packets and handling two-way communication are handled here. 4) Transport: Makes sure the lower three layers are doing their job correctly, and provides a transparent, logical data stream between the end user and the network service s/he is using. This is the lower layer that provides local user services. 3) Network: This layer makes certain that a packet sent from one device to another actually gets there in a reasonable period of time. Routing and flow control are performed here. This is the lowest layer of the OSI model that can remain ignorant of the physical network. PAGE 5-2 SECTION 5: APPENDICES I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 2) Data Link: This layer deals with getting data packets on and off the physical layer, error detection and correction and retransmission. This layer is generally broken into two sub-layers: The LLC (Logical Link Control) on the upper half, which does the error checking, and the MAC (Medium Access Control) on the lower half, which deals with getting the data on and off the physical layer (wire, fiber and Tsunami Wireless Bridges). 1) Physical: The nuts and bolts layer. Here is where the cable, fiber, radio, connector and signaling specifications are defined. Q: What does an Ethernet packet look like?
A. See the information below, as described in the National Databook. The Ethernet packet preamble is normally generated by the chipset. Software is responsible for the destination address, source address, type, and data. The chips normally will append the frame check sequence.
| | Preamble
| 62 bits | A series of alternating 1's and 0's used by the
| | Ethernet receiver to acquire bit synchronization.
| | Start Of Frame Delimiter
| 2 bits | Two consecutive 1 bits used to acquire byte
| | alignment.
| | Destination Ethernet Address
| 6 bytes | Address of the intended receiver.
| | The broadcast address is all 1's.
| | Source Ethernet Address
| 6 bytes | The unique Ethernet address of the sending
| | station.
| | Length or Type field
| 2 bytes | For IEEE 802.3 this is the number of bytes of
| | data.
| 46 bytes | Data
| to | Short packets must be padded to 46 bytes.
| 1500 bytes |
| | Frame Check Sequence(CRC) -
| 4 bytes | The FCS is a 32 bit CRC calculated using
| | the AUTODIN II polynomial.
The shortest packet is: 6 + 6 + 2 + 46 = 60 bytes The longest packet is: 6 + 6 + 2 + 1500
= 1514 bytes Q: What is a MAC address?
A:
It is the unique hexadecimal (numbering base 16) serial number assigned to each Ethernet network device to identify it on the network.. With Ethernet devices (as with most SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-3 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 other network types), this address is permanently set at the time of manufacturer, though it can usually be changed through software (though this is generally a Very Bad Thing to do). Q: Why must the MAC address to be unique?
A: Each communicating end device (not bridges) has a unique MAC address, so that it will be able to exclusively grab packets off the network meant for it. If MAC addresses are not unique, there is no way to distinguish between two devices. Devices on the network watch network traffic and look for their own MAC address in each packet to determine whether they should decode it or not. Special circumstances exist for broadcasting to every device. Q: Is there a special numbering scheme for MAC addresses?
A: The MAC addresses are exactly 6 bytes in length, and are usually written in hexadecimal as 12:34:56:78:90:AB (the colons may be omitted, but generally make the address more readable). Each manufacturer of Ethernet devices applies for a certain range of MAC addresses they can use. The first three bytes of the address determine the manufacturer. RFC-1700 (available via FTP) lists some of the manufacturer-assigned MAC addresses. A more up-to-date listing of vendor MAC address assignments is available on ftp.lcs.mit.edu in pub/map/Ethernet-codes. Q: What does CRC mean?
A: Cyclical Redundancy Check - A method of detecting errors in a message by performing a mathematical calculation on the bits in the message and then sending the results of the calculation along with the message. The receiving work-station performs the same calculation on the message data as it receives it and then checks the results against those transmitted at the end of the message. If the results don't match, the receiving end asks the sending end to send again. Q: What do 10Base5, 10BaseT, 10Base2, etc mean?
A: These are the IEEE names for the different physical types of Ethernet. The "10" stands for maximum signaling speed: 10MHz. "Base" means Baseband. 10BaseT, where the T means twisted pair, and 10BaseF where the F means fiber (see the following Q&A for specifics). This actually comes from the IEEE committee number for that media. In actual practice:
10Base2 Is a maximum of 10MHz Ethernet running over thin, 50 Ohm baseband coaxial cable. 10Base2 is also commonly referred to as thin-Ethernet or Cheapernet. 10Base5 is 10MHz Ethernet running over standard (thick) 50 Ohm baseband coaxial cabling. 10BaseF is Ethernet running over fiber-optic cabling. 10BaseT is Ethernet running over unshielded, twisted-pair cabling. Q: What is UTP?
A: Twisted pair cables. UTP is for Unshielded, Twisted Pair, while STP is for Shielded, PAGE 5-4 SECTION 5: APPENDICES I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Twisted Pair. UTP is what's typically installed by phone companies (though this is often not of high enough quality for high- speed network use) and is what 10BaseT Ethernet runs over. UTP is graded according to its data carrying ability (e.g., Level 3, Level 4, Level 5). 10BaseT Ethernet requires at least Level 3 cable. Many sites now install only Level-5 UTP (CATegory 5), even though level 4 is more than sufficient for 10BaseT, because of the greater likelihood that emerging high-speed standards will require cable with better bandwidth capabilities. Q: Are there any restrictions on how Ethernet is cabled?
A: Yes, there are many, and they vary according to the media used. First of all, there are distance limitations: 10BaseT generally accepted to have a maximum run of 100-150M, but is really based on signal loss in dB's (11.5db maximum loss source to destination). Then there are limitations on the number of repeaters and cable segments allowed between any two stations on the network. The rule is, any possible path between two network devices on an unbridged/unrouted network cannot pass through more than 4 repeaters or hubs, nor more than 3 populated cable segments. 10BaseT and 10BaseF are star-wired, so there is no minimum distance requirement between devices, since devices cannot be connected serially. You can install up to the Ethernet maximum of 1024 stations per network with both 10BaseT and 10BaseF. Q: When should I choose BaseT, BaseF (or others)?
A: The specific environment and application must be considered when selecting your media type. However, there are some general rules-of-thumb that you can consider:
Avoid using copper between buildings. The electrical disturbances caused by lightning, as well as naturally occurring differences in ground potential over distance, can very quickly and easily cause considerable damage to equipment and people. The use of fiber-optic cabling between buildings eliminates network cabling as a safety risk. There are also various wireless media available for inter-building links, such as laser, spread-spectrum RF and microwave. 10BaseT is the most flexible topology for LANs, and is generally the best choice for most network installations. 10/100/1000BaseT hubs, or multi-hub concentrators, are typically installed in a central location to the user community, and inexpensive UTP cabling is run to each network device (which may be 100m, or 330ft, from the hub). The signaling technology is very reliable, even in somewhat noisy environments, and 1 hubs will usually detect many network error conditions and automatically shut-down the offending port(s) without affecting the rest of the network (unless, of course, the offending port was your server, shared printer, or router to the rest of the world. 100/1000BaseF, and its predecessor, FOIRL, are the only recommended topologies for inter-building links. However, they need not be limited to this role. 100/1000BaseF can also be run to the desktop, though the cost is prohibitively high in all but the most specialized environments (generally, extremely noisy manufacturing facilities, or very security-conscious installations). More commonly, FOIRL (and now, 10BaseF) is used inside buildings and long distance wireless connections to form backbone networks. Q: Is there an official "standard" punch down scheme for 10BaseT?
SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-5 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 A: Get a copy of EIA/TIA-568, it covers all of that sort of stuff: horizontal, vertical, connectors, patch cords, cross-connects, etc. Q: Is it safe to run Unshield Twisted Pair next to power cable?
A: According to EIA/TIA-569, the standard wiring practices for running data cabling and companion to the above referenced EIA/TIA-568, you should not run data cable parallel to power cables. However, in reality, this should not be a problem with networks such as 10BaseT. 10BaseT uses differential signaling to pick the data signals off the wire. Since any interference from nearby power lines will usually affect all pairs equally, anything that is not canceled-out by the twists in the UTP should be ignored by the receiving network interface. Q: Can I connect the 10BaseT interface of two devices directly together, without using a hub?
A: Yes, but not more than 2 devices, and you also need a special jumper cable between the two 10BaseT ports:
RJ45 pin RJ45 pin
1 <--[TX+]--------[RX+]--> 3 2 <--[TX-]--------[RX-]--> 6 3 <--[RX+]--------[TX+]--> 1 6 <--[RX-]--------[TX-]--> 2 Q: What is a "segment"?
A: A piece of network wire bounded by bridges, routers, repeaters or terminators. Q: What is a "subnet"?
A: Another overloaded term. It can mean, depending on the usage, a segment, a set of machines grouped together by a specific protocol feature (note that these machines do not have to be on the same segment, but they could be) or a big nylon thing used to capture enemy subs. Q: What is a repeater?
A: A repeater acts on a purely electrical level to connect to segments. All it does is amplify and reshape (and, depending on the type, possibly retime) the analog waveform to extend network segment distances. It does not know anything about addresses or forwarding, thus it cannot be used to reduce traffic as a bridge can in the example above. Q: What is a "hub"?
A: A hub is a common wiring point for star-topology networks, and is a common synonym for concentrator (though the latter generally has additional features or capabilities). 10BaseT and 10BaseF Ethernet and many proprietary network topologies use hubs to connect multiple cable runs in a star-wired network topology into a single network. Hubs have PAGE 5-6 SECTION 5: APPENDICES I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 multiple ports to attach the different cable runs. Some hubs (such as 10BaseT) include electronics to regenerate and retime the signal between each hub port. Others (such as 10BaseF) simply act as signal splitters, similar to the multi-tap cable-TV splitters you might use on your home antenna coax (of course, 10BaseF uses mirrors to split the signals between cables). Q: What is a bridge?
A: A bridge will connect to distinct segments and transmit traffic between them. This allows you to extend the maximum size of the network while still not breaking the maximum wire length, attached device count, or number of repeaters for a network segment. Q: What does a "learning bridge"?
A: A learning bridge monitors MAC (OSI layer 2) addresses on both sides of its connection and attempts to learn which addresses are on which side. It can then decide when it receives a packet whether it should cross the bridge or stay local (some packets may not need to cross the bridge because the source and destination addresses are both on one side). If the bridge receives a packet that it doesn't know the addresses of, it will forward it by default. IEEEs standard for a learning bridge is 802.1D. Q: Is there a maximum number of bridges allowed on a network?
A: Per IEEE 802.1 (d), the maximum number of concatenated brides in a bridged LAN is 7. This number is rather arbitrary, however, and is based on simulations of application performance with expected bridge delays. In addition, the number assumes that all bridges are LOCAL (no remote WAN connections), and that the default Hold Time of 1 second is in place (this is the time after which a bridge will discard a frame it is holding). This prevents extra-late frame delivery. (i.e, a frame should never be delivered more than ~7 seconds after is it sent). The rule of thumb for wireless WAN bridged LANs is to limit the number of hops to 4. Q: What is a router?
A: Routers work much like bridges, but they pay attention to the upper network layer protocols (OSI layer 3) rather than data link layer (OSI layer 2) protocols. A router will decide whether to forward a packet by looking at the protocol level addresses (for instance, TCP/IP addresses) rather than the MAC address. Because routers work at layer 3 of the OSI stack, it is possible for them to transfer packets between different media types (i.e., leased lines, Ethernet, token ring, X.25, Frame Relay and FDDI). Many routers can also function as bridges. Q: So should I use a router or a bridge?
A: There is no absolute answer to this. Your network layout, type and amount of hosts and traffic, and other issues (both technical and non-technical) must be considered. Routing would always be preferable to bridging except that routers are slower and usually more expensive (due to the amount of processing required to look inside the physical packet SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-7 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 and determine which interface that packet needs to get sent out), and that many applications use non-routable protocols. Rules of thumb:
Bridges are usually good choices for small networks with few, if any, slow redundant links between destinations or for connecting distant LANs. Further, bridges may be your only choice for certain protocols, unless you have the means to encapsulate (tunnel) the un-
routable protocol inside a routable protocol. Routers are usually much better choices for larger networks, particularly where you want to have a relatively clean WAN backbone. Routers are better at protecting against protocol errors (such as broadcast storms) and bandwidth utilization. Since routers look deeper inside the data packet, they can also make forwarding decisions based on the upper-layer protocols. Occasionally, a combination of the two devices are the best way to go. Bridges can be used to segment small networks that are geographically close to each other, between each other and the router to the rest of the WAN. Q: Are there problems mixing Bridging & Routing?
A: Only if you plan on having bridged links in parallel with routed links. You need to be very careful about running bridges providing links in parallel to a router. Bridges may forward broadcast requests which will confuse the router there are lots of protocols you may not think of filtering (e.g. ARP, Apple ARP over 802.3 etc. etc.). Also, DECnet routers have the same MAC address on all ports. This will probably cause the bridge to think it is seeing an Ethernet loop. Q: Who makes the fastest/easiest/most advanced bridges or routers?
A: The IETF runs bench marks on a wide selection of wired/fiber bridges and routers. Network Computing runs bench marks for wireless routers (point-to-multipoint) and bridges (point-to-point). Q: What does "IPG" mean?
A: The InterPacket Gap (more properly referred to as the InterFrame Gap, or IFG) is an enforced quiet time of 9.6 us between transmitted Ethernet frames. Q: What means "promiscuous mode"?
A: Promiscuous mode is a condition where the network interface controller will pass all Ethernet frames, regardless of destination address, up to the higher level network layers. Normally the network controller will only pass up frames that have that device's destination address. However, when put in promiscuous mode, all frames are passed on up the network stack regardless of destination address. Promiscuous mode is usually used by network monitoring tools and transparent bridges. Q: What is a collision?
PAGE 5-8 SECTION 5: APPENDICES I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 A: A condition where two devices detect that the network is idle and end up trying to send packets at exactly the same time (within 1 round-trip delay). Since only one device can transmit at a time, both devices must back off and attempt to retransmit again. The retransmission algorithm requires each device to wait a random amount of time, so the two are very likely to retry at different times, and thus the second one will sense that the network is busy and wait until the packet is finished. If the two devices retry at the same time (or almost the same time) they will collide again, and the process repeats until either the packet finally makes it onto the network without collisions, or 16 consecutive collision occur and the packet is aborted. Q: What causes a collision?
A: See above. Ethernet is a CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access/ Collision Detect) system. It is possible to not sense carrier from a previous device and attempt to transmit anyway, or to have two devices attempt to transmit at the same time; in either case a collision results. Ethernet is particularly susceptible to performance loss from such problems when people ignore the "rules" for wiring Ethernet. Q: How many collisions are too many?
A: This depends on your application and protocol. In many cases, collision rates of 50% will not cause a large decrease in perceived throughput. If your network is slowing down and you notice the percentage of collisions is on the high side, you may want try segmenting your network with either a bridge or router to see if performance improves. Q: How do I reduce the number of collisions?
A: Disconnect devices from the network. Seriously, you need to cut- down on the number of devices on the network segment to affect the collision rate. This is usually accomplished by splitting the segment into two pieces and putting a bridge or router in between them. Q: What is a late collision?
A: A late collision occurs when two devices transmit at the same time, but due to cabling errors (most commonly, excessive network segment length or repeaters between devices) neither detects a collision. The reason this happens is because the time to propagate the signal from one end of the network to another is longer than the time to put the entire packet on the network, so the two devices that cause the late collision never see that the other's sending until after it puts the entire packet on the network. Late collisions are detected by the transmitter after the first "slot time" of 64 byte times. They are only detected during transmissions of packets longer than 64 bytes. It's detection is exactly the same as for a normal collision; it just happens "too late."
Typical causes of late collisions are segment cable lengths in excess of the maximum permitted for the cable type, faulty connectors or improper cabling, excessive numbers of repeaters between network devices, and defective Ethernet transceivers or controllers. Another negative concerning late collisions is that they occur for small packets also, but cannot be detected by the transmitter. A network suffering a measurable rate of late collisions (on large packets) is also suffering lost small packets. The higher protocols do not cope well with such losses. Well, they cope, but at much reduced speed. A 1% packet SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-9 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 loss is enough to reduce the speed of NFS by 90% with the default retransmission timers. That's a 10 times increase of the problem!
Finally, Ethernet controllers do not retransmit packets lost to late collisions. Q: What is a jam?
A: When a workstation receives a collision, and it is transmitting, it puts out a jam so all other stations will see the collision also. When a repeater detects a collision on one port, it puts out a jam on all other ports, causing a collision to occur on those lines that are transmitting, and causing any non-transmitting stations to wait to transmit. Q: What is a broadcast storm?
A: An overloaded term that describes an overloaded protocol. Basically it describes a condition where devices on the network are generating traffic that by its nature causes the generation of even more traffic. The inevitable result is a huge degradation of performance or complete loss of the network as the devices continue to generate more and more traffic. This can be related to the physical transmission or to very high level protocols. Q: How do I recognize a broadcast storm?
A: That depends on what level it is occurring. Basically you have to be aware of the potential for it beforehand and be looking for it, because in a true broadcast storm you will probably be unable to access the network. This can change dramatically for a higher level protocol. NFS contention can result in a dramatic DROP in Ethernet traffic, yet no one will have access to resources. Q: How can I prevent a broadcast storm?
A: Avoid protocols that are prone to it. Route (with routers) or Bridge (with wired/wireless bridges) when it is practical. Q: What is *high* traffic on an Ethernet? 5%? 20%? 90%?
A: High traffic is when things start slowing down to the point they are no longer acceptable. There is not set percentage point, in other words. Usually start paying attention when it gets over 40-50%. Q: Why do I see different throughput speeds?
A: Bridges (such as Tsunami) are ISO Layer 2 Data Link Layer (use MAC address for filtering) devices where they provide their full stated throughput. At level 2 (bridges) or 3
(routers) where hardware plays the major part, the most common tester is the SmartBits 200 product from NetCom Systems. At Application Layer 7, you will see less than 40%
throughput from the maximum capacity measured w/SmartBits due to the increased protocol/software overhead at that level. Layer 7 can be tested with software such as Ganymede's Chariot or Qcheck product. PAGE 5-10 SECTION 5: APPENDICES I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 As an example: testing copper CAT5 cable with SmartBits will test 100% throughput (let's say you can send/rcv a full 10Mbps). At Layer 7 you will be transferring data at the 10Mbps rate, but only 4Mbps of user data will transfer (Ethernet has a high overhead of bytes added to each data packet each time you go up a layer). The advantage is the more complex overhead makes the data virtually resilient to corruption and minor errors (i.e. collisions), its easy to reroute and can use inexpensive plug/play devices like hubs/switches instead of multiplexers as used in the telco industry (i.e. LYNX T1 radios) Western Multiplex tests at Layer 2 where bridges are defined. At layer 7 (Application Layer), you will see less than 40% or more depending on the other traffic that may be on the LAN as this layer is more dependent on the type of data being sent (it does not matter if it's wire, fiber or any Ethernet bridge -wired or wireless). Another way to look at it: the model 31145 12Mbps (10Mbps 10BaseT+T1/E1 wayside) bridge will test the same as a piece of CAT5 Ethernet cable. Q: How can I test an Ethernet?
A: This depends on what level you want to test. The most basic test (a.k.a., "the fire test") is to connect a pair of devices to the network and see if they can communicate with each other. If you want to test the electrical integrity of the wire (i.e., will it carry a signal properly), a TDR or cable scanner that incorporates TDR and other functions, would be the most comprehensive tool. If you need to test the performance or troubleshoot protocol transmission problems, you will need special and usually very expensive software, usually coupled with custom hardware, to capture, optionally filter, and analyze the network packets. Also, see the answer to the question above. Q: What is a "TDR"?
A: A Time-Domain Reflectometer is a tool used to detect cable faults. This device operates by sending a brief signal pulse down the cable and looking for its reflection to bounce back. By analyzing the reflected pulse, it is possible to make judgments about the quality of the cable segment. More advanced units can not only detect and identify the nature of the problem, but give a reasonably accurate indication of the problem's location (distance from the point of the test). There is also a device known as an OTDR, which is an Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer for fiber-optic cables. Q: What is a "BERT"?
A: Bit Error Rate Tester. This equipment is used to analyze the amount and types of errors that occur on a cable segment. Q: What (free) tools are there to monitor/decode/etc an Ethernet?
A: There are many built into most DOS ,Unix and other operating systems. For example, the ping command can be used to determine if a given host is alive, and will also tell you the round trip transmission time. The command ifconfig will tell you the status of the network interfaces. netstat will summarize statistics for network usage. DOS commands (through Windows DOS application) are:
ARP SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-11 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Displays and modifies the IP-to-Physical address translation tables used by address resolution protocol (ARP). ARP -a [inet_addr] [-N if_addr]
-a
-g
-d
-s Displays current ARP entries by interrogating the current protocol data. If inet_addr is specified, the IP and Physical addresses for only the specified computer are displayed. If more than one network interface uses ARP, entries for each ARP table are displayed. Same as -a. inet_addr Specifies an internet address.
-N if_addr Displays the ARP entries for the network interface specified by if_addr. Deletes the host specified by inet_addr. Adds the host and associates the Internet address inet_addr with the Physical address eth_addr. The Physical address is given as 6 hexadecimal bytes separated by hyphens. The entry is permanent. eth_addr if_addr Specifies a physical address. If present, this specifies the Internet address of the interface whose address translation table should be modified. If not present, the first applicable interface will be used. Example:
> arp -s 157.55.85.212 00-aa-00-62-c6-09 .... Adds a static entry.
> arp -a .... Displays the arp table. FTP Transfers files to and from a computer running an FTP server service (sometimes called a daemon). FTP can be used interactively. FTP [-v] [-d] [-i] [-n] [-g] [-s:filename] [-a] [-w:windowsize] [-A] [host]
-v
-n
-i
-d
-g
-s:filename
-a
-A
-w:buffersize host Suppresses display of remote server responses. Suppresses auto-login upon initial connection. Turns off interactive prompting during multiple file transfers. Enables debugging. Disables filename globbing (see GLOB command). Specifies a text file containing FTP commands; the commands will automatically run after FTP starts. Use any local interface when binding data connection. login as anonymous. Overrides the default transfer buffer size of 4096. Specifies the host name or IP address of the remote host to connect to. Notes:
- mget and mput commands take y/n/q for yes/no/quit.
- Use Control-C to abort commands. NET CONFIG Displays your current workgroup settings. NET DIAG Runs the Microsoft Network Diagnostics program to display diagnostic information about your network. NET HELP Provides information about commands and error messages. PAGE 5-12 SECTION 5: APPENDICES I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 NET INIT NET LOGOFF Loads protocol and network-adapter drivers without binding them to Protocol Manager. Breaks the connection between your computer and the shared resources to which it is connected. NET LOGON Identifies you as a member of a workgroup. NET PASSWORD Changes your logon password. NET PRINT Displays information about print queues and controls print jobs. NET START Starts services. NET STOP NET TIME NET USE NET VER NET VIEW Stops services. Displays the time on or synchronizes your computer's clock with the clock on a Microsoft Windows for Workgroups, Windows NT, Windows 95, or NetWare time server. Connects to or disconnects from a shared resource or displays information about connections. Displays the type and version number of the workgroup redirector you are using. Displays a list of computers that share resources or a list of shared resources on a specific computer. For more information about a specific Microsoft NET command, type the command name followed by /? (for example, NET VIEW /?). PING PING [-t] [-a] [-n count] [-l size] [-f] [-i TTL] [-v TOS] [-r count] [-s count] [[-j host-list] | [-k host-list]] [-w timeout] destination-list
-t
-a
-n count
-l size
-f
-i TTL
-v TOS
-r count
-s count
-j host-list
-k host-list
-w timeout ROUTE Ping the specified host until stopped. To see statistics and continue - type Control-Break; To stop - type Control-C. Resolve addresses to hostnames. Number of echo requests to send. Send buffer size. Set Don't Fragment flag in packet. Time To Live. Type Of Service. Record route for count hops. Timestamp for count hops. Loose source route along host-list. Strict source route along host-list. Timeout in milliseconds to wait for each reply. SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-13 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Manipulates network routing tables. ROUTE [-f] [command [destination] [MASK netmask] [gateway] [METRIC metric]]
-f Clears the routing tables of all gateway entries. If this is used in conjunction with one of the commands, the tables are cleared prior to running the command. command Must be one of four:
PRINT ADD DELETE CHANGE Prints a route Adds a route Deletes a route Modifies an existing route destination Specifies the destination host. MASK Specifies that the next parameter is the 'netmask' value. netmask Specifies a subnet mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it defaults to 255.255.255.255. gateway Specifies gateway. METRIC Specifies that the next paramenter 'metric' is the cost for this destination All symbolic names used for destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS. The symbolic names for gateway are looked up in the host name database file HOSTS. If the command is PRINT or DELETE, wildcards may be used for the destination and gateway, or the gateway argument may be omitted. Diagnostic Notes:
Invalid MASK generates an error, that is when (DEST & MASK) != DEST. Example> route ADD 157.0.0.0 MASK 155.0.0.0 157.55.80.1 The route addition failed: 87 Examples:
> route
> route
> route
> route
> route SNMP PRINT ADD 157.0.0.0 MASK 255.0.0.0 157.55.80.1
^destination PRINT DELETE 157.0.0.0 PRINT
^gateway
^mask METRIC 3
^metric Starts SNMP agent
-close Closes previously running instance of snmp
-help Displays SNMP help dialog box TELNET PAGE 5-14 SECTION 5: APPENDICES I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Opens telnet window TRACERT TRACERT [-d] [-h maximum_hops] [-j host-list] [-w timeout] target_name
-d
-h maximum_hops
-j host-list
-w timeout Do not resolve addresses to hostnames. Maximum number of hops to search for target. Loose source route along host-list. Wait timeout milliseconds for each reply. WINIPCFG Opens IP configuration window
/All - Display detailed information
/Batch - [filename] Write to file or .\winipcfg.out
/renew_all - Renew all adapters
/release_all - Release all adapters
/renew N - Renew adapter N
/release N - Release adapter N Q: What books are good about Ethernet LAN's?
A: The IEEE 802.3 documents are considered the definitive source for information on Ethernet. However, these may not be suitable for all levels of users. Surprisingly, there are few good books specifically dealing with Ethernet LANs, but here are a few that you might find useful:
Local Area Networks, An introduction to the technology by John E. McNamara, published by Digital Press, 1985 165 pps. with index and glossary, $29.00 ISBN 0-932376-79-7, Digital Press part number EY-00051-DP. Network Troubleshooting Guide by Digital Equipment Corporation, August 1990 Approx. 278 pps. with index and glossary, $95.00 Digital Press part number EK-339AB-GD-002. These books and others are recommended in the network reading list, net-read.txt, from ftp.utexas.edu. Q: Where can I get IEEE802.x docs online?
A: Not available online. IEEE documents can be ordered directly from the IEEE themselves. You can contact them at:
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 445 Hoes Lane P.O. Box 1331 Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331 U.S.A. (800) 678-IEEE Q: Where can I get EIA/TIA docs online?
A: Not available online They can be ordered from:
SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-15 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Global Engineering 800-854-7179 PAGE 5-16 SECTION 5: APPENDICES I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Appendix C Auxiliary Data Connectors The following figures illustrate the pin structure for all auxiliary connections. All figures are oriented as a customer would view them, facing the connector. DC power connection information is found in Section 3.7 of this manual. Figure D-1: VF Port Connection Figure D-2: Alarm Port Connections Figure D-3: Config(uration) Port 9-Pin D-Style Connector Do NOT connect to RS-422 pins at any time. SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-17 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Figure D-4: AUX DATA Port 9-Pin D-Style Connector Do NOT connect to RS-422 pins at any time. PAGE 5-18 SECTION 5: APPENDICES I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Appendix D Installation and Troubleshooting (foldout) Fold-out page inserted after this page SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-19 I N S T A L L A T I O N A N D M A I N T E N A N C E M A N U A L T s u n a m i F A M I L Y G I G A B I T E T H E R N E T W I R E L E S S B R I D G E S J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 Your Notes on the Tsunami Radio PAGE 5-20 SECTION 5: APPENDICES Index A AC.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-13 Accessories ................................................................................................................................................ 2-14 AIS............................................................................................................................................................... 2-5 Alarm connections ..................................................................................................................................... 3-24 Alarms ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-21 Alignment, antenna .................................................................................................................................... 3-16 AMI ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-5 Antenna.............................................................................................................................. 2-3, 3-3, 3-16, 3-20 Antenna installation ................................................................................................................................... 3-14 Antenna planning......................................................................................................................................... 3-7 ARP ........................................................................................................................................................... 5-12 Auxiliary connectors.................................................................................................................................. 5-17 Availability calculation................................................................................................................................ 3-6 B B8ZS............................................................................................................................................................ 2-5 Bit Error Rate .............................................................................................................................................. 3-6 bridge........................................................................................................................................................... 5-7 Buffer....................................................................................................................................................2-4, 5-1 C Calculations ................................................................................................................................................. 3-5 Caution ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-2 collision ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-9 Connections ................................................................................................................2-4, 2-5, 2-11, 3-18, 5-1 Container ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-1 CRC ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-4 D DC ......................................................................................................................................................3-7, 3-11 Delay............................................................................................................................................................ 5-1 Digital Capacity........................................................................................................................................... 2-4 DSX-1.......................................................................................................................................................... 2-5 Duplex ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-1 E EIRP .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-20 Environment ................................................................................................................................................ 2-6 Errors ........................................................................................................................................................... 4-9 Ethernet........................................................................................................................................................ 5-2 Ethernet packet ............................................................................................................................................ 5-3 F Fade margin ................................................................................................................................................. 3-6 Filtering ................................................................................................................................................2-4, 5-1 Fresnel ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-4 Front panel................................................................................................................................................... 2-7 FTP ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-12 G Grounding.................................................................................................................................................. 3-11 H hub ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-7 I Icons ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-2 IEEE .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-15 Indicators ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-9 Installation ................................................................................................................1-1, 2-14, 3-3, 3-14, 3-19 ISO............................................................................................................................................................. 5-11 ISO 9000.......................................................................................................................................................... i L LAN............................................................................................................................................................. 2-4 LAYER........................................................................................................................................................ 5-2 learning ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-7 Line-of-sight ................................................................................................................................................ 3-4 Link budget.................................................................................................................................................. 3-5 Loopback ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-5 M MAC address ............................................................................................................................................... 5-4 Mechanical................................................................................................................................................... 2-6 Mounting ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-9 N NMS .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-13 Note ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-2 O Orderwire................................................................................................................2-5, 2-11, 3-19, 3-21, 3-22 OSI Model ................................................................................................................................................... 5-2 P Path.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-4 Path planning ............................................................................................................................................... 3-7 PING.......................................................................................................................................................... 5-13 Power..........................................................................................................................2-2, 2-6, 2-14, 3-3, 3-10 Power connection....................................................................................................................................... 3-13 Power connection, DC ............................................................................................................................... 3-11 Power supply planning................................................................................................................................. 3-7 Professional installation..........................................................................................................................iii, 1-1 R Rear panel.................................................................................................................................................. 2-13 Receive signal level ...........................................................................................2-8, 3-3, 3-5, 3-14, 3-15, 3-16 Receiver....................................................................................................................................................... 2-3 Regulatory ...................................................................................................................................... iii, 2-6, 5-1 REN ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-22 Repair .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-3 repeater ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-6 RF Exposure .............................................................................................................................................. 3-14 ROUTE...................................................................................................................................................... 5-14 router ........................................................................................................................................................... 5-7 RS-232.................................................................................................................................... 2-12, 3-26, 3-27 RSL............................................................................................................................................................ 3-16 S Shipping..............................................................................................................................................2-14, 3-1 SNMP ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-15 subnet........................................................................................................................................................... 5-6 System ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-4 T Technical support ........................................................................................................................................ 4-2 Telephone .................................................................................................................................................. 3-22 Telnet......................................................................................................................................................... 4-25 TelNet........................................................................................................................................................ 4-13 TELNET...........................................................................................................................................2-12, 5-15 Test .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-5 Tips.............................................................................................................................................................. 1-2 Tools............................................................................................................................................................ 3-8 traffic ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-10 Transmitter................................................................................................................................................... 2-2 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................... 4-1 Turn-up ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-19 U Update ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-24 UTP ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-5 W Warranty ......................................................................................................................................................... v WINIPCFG................................................................................................................................................ 5-15 For ISO Purposes -
Last Page of this Manual
1 2 | Part 1 | Users Manual | 2.17 MiB |
GS WESTERN Multiplex |
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL WIRELESS. FAST ETHERNET BRIDGES
(5.3/5.8 and 5.8 GHz, UNII/LE-LAN) MAN-27700 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES , WE s TERN Multiplex JULY 2000 aa Installation and Maintenance Manual Copyright 1999 & 2000 by Western Multiplex. All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without prior written permission from Western Muttipiex. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Western Multiplex shali not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual or equipment supplied with this manual. Western Multiplex makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual or any equipment supplied with this manual, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Heliax is a registered product of Andrews Corporation. OpenView is a registered product of Hewlett Packard Corporation. SmartBits is a registered product of NetCom Systems inc. Windows is a registered product of Microsoft Inc. Chariot and Qcheck are a registered products of Ganymede Software Inc. Gabriel HE or HES parabolic antennas are products of Gabriel Electronics Inc. Other names are trademarks of their owners Printed in the United States of America Notice: Y2K (Year 2000 Issue) All software supplied by and for Western Multiplex products adheres to the four-(4) digit year nomenclature as required for Year 2000 compliance. Western Muitiplex 1196 Borregas Avenue Sunnyvale, California USA Tek +1 408 542-5200 Fax: +1 408 542-5300 Our facility has been Registered fo the international Organization for Standardization
{SO 9000 Series Standards for quality. Issue: July 2000 er INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Tsunami FAMILY We TERN SPREAD SPECTRUM RADIOS Multiplex JULY 2000 Revision history:
July 2000: Updated Section 2.1 Fixed Table 3-B title Added TeiNet detail (Section 4.11.5) it Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN Multiplex INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Regulatory Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures.
Recrient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded cables and /O cords must be used for this equipment to comply with the relevant FCC regulations. Changes or modifications not expressly approved in writing by Western Multipiex may void the user's authority to operate this equipment. , This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This device must be professionally installed. INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY WE 5 TERN SPREAD SPECTRUM RADIOS Multiplex JULY 2009 This page intentionally left blank iv INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000
. WESTERN Multiplex WARRANTY GENERAL TERMS 1.7. All Definitions comaines in Western Multipexs Conditions of Sale
(Westem Multiplex document number CS96-8}, apply ta the Warranty. 1.2 Sudject to the provisions of the Warranty, Western Multiplex warrants tha: the equipment describec in Paragraph 1.3 shall conform to their specifications described in Paragraph 1.4 in all material respects and that the equipment shail be free from material defects in materials anc workmanship. 1.3. This Warranty apolies to all original purchases of Western. Mu-tiolex manufactured equipment and accessories (collectively the Equipment}
14 This Warsanty applies to the specifications containec in the most recent version of the manual for the model of the Equipment purchased (the "Specifications}. 1.6 This Warranty does not apply te the following items of Equipment which are covered by the Criginal Equipment Manufacturer's warranty:
{a} antenna systems inctucing coax cabie, waveguide, connectors flex-sections, mounts, other parts of the antenna system and installation materials;
(0) non-Western Multiplex manufactured rack mounted equipment that is assembled wired and tested al Western Multiplex's factory or supplied as part of a system, including orderwire items, cnannel banks, multiplexers, fusavaiarm panels, remote aiarm items; and
(c) equipment which is not listed in Western Multiplexs price book. 18 The effective period of this Warranty shall start on the aate of snipment of the Equipment and shall end:
(a) for all spread spectrum unlicensed radia products and for ail licensed digital microwave radw products, two {2) years later;
{b} for all analog microwave radio products, three (3) years later. or
{c) _ for all baseband products, jive (5} years later (in @ach case the
"Warranty Period":
(7 The Customer acknowledges that Western Multiplex does not represent or warrant that the services provided py Western Multiplex under this Warranty wilt ensure uninterrupted or erar-
free operation of the Equiomant. RETURN OF EQUIPMENT UNDER WARRANTY 2.1 Ifan item of Equipment maifunctions or fails in normat intended usage and maintenance withia the applicable Warranty Period.
(a) the Customer shalt prompty notify Wester Multiplex of the problem and the senai number of the defective itam;
<6) ~Westerr Multiplex shall, at its sole option. sither -esolve the problem over the telephone or provide the Custorner with 3 Returned Materials Authorization number (RMA #} and the address of the location to which the Customer may ship the defective item;
() _ if the problem is not resalved over the telephone, the Customer shall attach a label to eacn Retumed item describing the fault ane the Customers Return aadress. The Customer shail, at its cost properly pack the icem to be Returned, prepay the insurance and shipping charges, and ship the item te the specified location;
{d) if the Western Multiplex product shal prove to pe defective in material or workmanship upon examinaten by Western Multiplex, Western Multiplex shail either repair cr -eplace the Returned tem at ts sole option. The reptacement item: may be new or refurbished; if refurbishes, it snall be equivalent in operation to new Equipmen:, Ifa Returmed item is replacec by Western Mukiplex, the Customer agrees that the Returned item shall become the property of Western Multiplex. fe) Western Multiplex shall at its cost, ship the repaired item or Teplacemen: to any destination within the United States of Amenca by cartier and method of delvery chosen by Western Multiplex. If the Customer has requested some other form cf conveyance, such as express snipping. or 's located beyond the USA borders, then the Customer shai! pay to the cast of retum shipment. 2.2 Equipment which is repaired or replaced ay Western Murtipiex under th:s Warranty shall be covered under ai! of the provisions of this Warranty fo the remainder of the applicable Warranty Perioc or ninety (90} days from the date of shipment of the repaired item or replacement, whichever period is .anger. DEFAULT AND TERMINATION 3.1 Western Muitiplex may immediately terminate this Warranty anc ai-
cf its performance under this Warranty, upen notifcation to tne Customer, if the Customer:
fa} makes any unauthorized modifications to the Ecuipment,
(D} assigns or transfers the Customer's rights or abiigations uncer this Warranty without the written consent of Western Muftiptex:
(c} becomes bankrupt or insolvent, or is out into receiversnip: or
(a) has net paid Westem Muftipiex ail amounts for ine Equipment, sevices, or other additional charges within thirty (30) days of receipt of written notice from Wester Muitiniex. 3.2 If this Warranty is terminated by Westem Muttipiex, the Custcmer shall remain liable for all amounts due to Westem Multiplex. FORCE MAJEURE 4.1 "Force Majeure' has the same meaning as defined ir. Wester Multiniex's Conditions of Sale (Western Multiptex documan:
number CS96-8). 4.2 Wesiem Mutipiex shall not be respcnsinle for failure tc discharge ts obligations under tnis Warranty due to Force Majeure. LIMITATIONS AND QUALIFICATIONS OF WARRANTY 5.1 This Warranty dogs not apply to any damage. defect or failure caused by:
{3} any par. of the Equipment having been modified, adapted. repaired, or improperty installed, operated, maintained. :ransponed or relocated by any person other than Wesfem Muitipiex perscnnal ora Western Multiplex authonzed service acent, wilhout Westam Multipiex's orier written consent;
(6) storage or environmencal conditions which do not conform to the applicable sections of the appropnate esiem Muiticiex Equiomeni Manual;
(c) failure to conform with the Equigment Installation, Operating and Maintenance Instructions of the appropriate Westem Multiplex Equiomen: Manual
(@) extama! causes, including external eleccrical stress or lightning, or use in conjunction witn incompatible equipment, unless suey use was with Western Muitipiex's prior written cansent, fe} cosmetic damage:
(f accidental damage, negligence, neglect, misbancling, abuse or misuse, other than by Westem Multiplex personne! or a Wester Multiplex authorized service agent: or
{g} Force Majeure. Please see reverse side for additional limitations on damages. WICS97-1 WESTERN Multiplex LIMITATIONS ON DAMAGES (North America}
6.4 6.2 6.3 6.4 THE WARRANTY STATED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS THE CUSTOMER'S EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY FOR THE EQUIPMENT: WESTERN MULTIPLEX SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND OF MERCHANTABILITY. WESTERN MULTIPLEX SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN TORT, INCLUDING LIABILITY IN NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY, AND SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY AT ALL FOR INJURY TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY. WESTERN MULTIPLEX'S LIABILITY FOR FAILURE TO FULFIL ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR ANY OTHER LIABILITY UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT OF THE PURCHASE PRICE-OF THE EQUIPMENT. THE REMEDIES STATED IN THIS WARRANTY ARE THE CUSTOMER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AGAINST WESTERN MULTIPLEX REGARDING THE EQUIPMENT EVEN IF WESTERN MULTIPLEX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF THEM, WESTERN MULTIPLEX SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING THE COST OF LABOR BY THE CUSTOMER'S OWN EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR CONTRACTORS IN IDENTIFYING, REMOVING OR REPLACING THE DEFECTIVE ITEM;
LOST PROFITS, AND REVENUES; FAILURE TO REALIZE EXPECTED SAVINGS; ANY CLAIM AGAINST 4 CUSTOMER BY A THIRD PARTY: OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC LOSSES OF ANY KIND. THESE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS ARE NOT MADE BY WESTERN MULTIPLEX WHERE PROHIBITED BY LAW. WICS97-*
vi INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 LIMITATIONS ON DAMAGES (International) 61 62 6.3 THE WARRANTY STATED iN THIS DOCUMENT IS THE CUSTOMER'S EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY FOR THE EQUIPMENT, ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND OF MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. WESTERN MULTIPLEX'S LIABILITY FOR FAILURE TO FULFIL ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER TH!S WARRANTY OR IN TORT OR AS A RESULT OF STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER LIABILITY UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE EQUIPMENT OR ITS SUPPLY SHALL BE LIMITED, EXCEPT IN RESPECT OF DEATH AND PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY WESTERN MULTIPLEXS NEGLIGENCE, TO THE AMOUNT OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE EQUIPMENT. THE REMEDIES STATED IN THIS WARRANTY ARE THE CUSTOMER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AGAINST WESTERN MULTIPLEX REGARDING THE EQUIPMENT. EVEN IF WESTERN MULTIPLEX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF THEM, WESTERN MULTIPLEX SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING THE COST OF LABOR BY THE CUSTOMER'S OWN EMPLOYEES. AGENTS OR CONTRACTORS IN IDENTIFYING, REMOVING OR REPLACING THE DEFECTIVE ITEM;
LOST PROFITS, AND REVENUES: FAILURE TO REALIZE EXPECTED SAVINGS; ANY CLAIM AGAINST A CUSTOMER BY A THIRD PARTY; OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL OR ECONOMIC LOSSES OF ANY KIND. a INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WESTERN JULY 2000 Multiplex CONDITIONS OF SALE DEFINITIONS: TERMS OF PAYMENT 4.4. In these Conditions. uniess there is something in the subject 5.1 The Customer shail pay for all Equiomen:. including snipping and matter or context necessarily inconsistent ta) Western Multiplex" means Western Multiplex (d.b.a. Westen Multiniex), Sunnyvae, CA;
ib) "Equipment means the equioment itemized on the QuetatiowOrder Acknowledgment ic} "International" means any locaton other than United States of America and Canada, including their territories and possessions id) "North Amenca means any location in the United States of America and Ganada, including their territories and possessions:
je} "Order Acknowledgment" means the sales order acknowledgment provided py Western Multiplex to the Customer.
(f) Payment insiructions means Western Muitipiexs payment instructions, (Western Multiplex document P497-1);
igh Quotation" means the quotation signed by an authorizec representative of Western Multiplex and provided to the Customer:
in) Shipping Data means the actual date on which the Equipment let Western Muttiplex's factory at Sunnyvale. CA U.S.A;
fi) Warranty means Westem Multip.ex s warranty, oocument W97-1;
{) Inveice" means the oill of goods prepared by Western Muitipiex for the equipment with the shipping and any insurance costs. Headings have been inserted in these Conditions for convenience of reference only and will rot effect their construction. ENTIRE AGREEMENT 2.1 The Quotation, these Conditions of Sale the Order Acknowledgment, the Payment Instructions and the Warranzy shail apply to all sales made by Western Multiplex and shall constitute the entire agreemen: by Western Multipiex and the Customer (the Agreement "). Any terms and/or conditions of sale, which may be inctuded on the Customer's purcnase order farm or any communication from the Customer. that are not identical with the terms and conditions steed in this document shall NOT become a part of the agreement f sale unless expressly agreed to in writing in the Quotation. Western Multiplex's failure to object to any terms and/or conditions. ef sale contained in any communication frem the Customer shall not be considered as acceptance of such terms and/or conditions or as a waiver of the terms and conditions of sale contained herein. Western Multiplex shail sell to che Customer, and the Customer shall purchase from Western Multtiolex, the Equipment in accordance with the Agreement. Western Nuitipnlex accepts the Customer's purchase orders for Equipment and agrees to deliver the Equipment to the Customer only on the terms of the Agreement. No variation of the Agreement shail be binding uniess agreed te in writing by authorized representatives of Western Multipiex and the Customer PRICING 3.1. All prices in the Quotation are exciusive of all shipping charges ard all appiicable taxes including but not limited to, federa:, state, local, excise. sales anc use taxes. All prices in the Quotation unless otherwise stated for North American customers are FOB Sunnyvale. CA, USA.
(New York Uniform Commercial Code}; or for international customers are Ex-VWorks, Sunnyvale, CA, USA.
(incoterms 1590). All prices in the Quotation include standara domestic packing, unless a separate ine item is provided detailing export or special packing cherges. SHIPPING AND INSURANCE 1.2 22 23 24 3.2
{ah
(o) 33 4.1 Western Multiplex shall arrange shipping and insurance when requested by the Custorner, and shail bill the Customer for the Equipment with the shipping and any insurance casts as sepacate items, on an invoice (the "invoice"!
42 Delivery dates quoted by Western Multiplex are te be considered estimates only. In no event will Western Multiplex be fiadle for any loss or damage resulting from its failure to celiver products within a Specified time. vii insurance in accordance with the terms of the Invoxe. Al tnvoices for North American Customers are due and payabie in thirty (30) days fror: the cate of the invore. International Custamers shail make payments in accordance with Western Multiptex's Payment instructions by either. providing a wire transer (telegraphic transfer} for the full arnount of the Equipment, shipping and insurance charges contained in the Quotation or the proforma invoice sent to the Customer, pnor to the Shipoing Date; or establishing an acceptable Letter of Credit (LC} for the full amount of the Equipment, shipping and insurance charges contaived in tne Quotation prior io the order being booked and accepteo Sy Westem Multiplex. If a Customer fails to pay an Invoice when due. Western Multiplex may, without prejudice to am other remedy, postpone shipments. alter payment terms. terrinate the Agreement and charge interest on all overdue amounts the rate of 1.5% per month compoundec monthiy (or if less, the maximum altowed by law). Upon demand. the Cisiomer shall pay all such interest cnarges and all reasonable collection fees, including reasonable legal expenses. SECURITY FOR PAYMENT 6.1 If the Customer is iocatec in North Amenca, the Customer grants to Wester Multiplex a purchase money security interest in the Equioment to secure the payment of the purchase pnce of the Equipment and ail other amounts due fron the Customer, If the Customer is not located in Norh America:
cespite delivery and passing of risk in the Equipment and any other provision of these Conditions. the title in the Equipment snail not pass to the Customer until Wester Muitipiex has received payment in fuil of the purchase price of the Equipment and alt other amounts then due from the Customer, and until the title in the Equipment passes to the Customer:
() the Customer shall hold the equipment: as Westem Multipiex 's fiduciary agent and bailee, anc shall properly store. protect ard insure the Equipment anc shall identify the Equipment as Westem Muitiplex property;
i the Customer fails to pay Western Multipiex in accordance with the agreed payment terms, Western Multiplex may require the Customer to deliver up the Equipment tc Westem Mutiolex, and, if ihe Customer dos not, Western Multiplex may enter on the premises where the Equipment is stored anc repossess the Equipment: and the Customer shalt not pledge the Equipment by way of security for any, indebtedness of the Customer, but if tre Customer coes so all moneys awed by the Customer to Western Multiplex shati, without prejudice to any other remedy of Westem Multiplex, immediately become due. CHANGES TO PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 7.4. Westem Multiplex may, without notice to the Customer, make changes to the specifications of Equipment which de not materially affect the quality or performance of the Equipment. EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION AND EXPEDITING CHARGES 2 5.3
{a)
(b}
54 6.2 fa) iii) 8.1 At the Customer's request, Westem Multiplex may for a fee agreed in advance:
{2) reconfigure the Equipment, or
{b) expedite the Customer's order. i WiCS97-t
: WESTERN Multiplex SHORTAGES 91 The customer shall nol make any claim for snortages (wnich ere items that the Invoice coes not show are on fack-order! after twenty-one (21) days after the date of the Invoice. RETURNS AND EXCHANGES 101 The rewrn of defective Equipment 's covered by the Warranty 40.2 The Customer may only returr Equipment that is not defective if:
(3) the Equipment does not correspone with the Customer's purchase order, or
(b) the Equipment has been ortered in error by the Customer anc Westem Multipiex has permitted the Custemer to remeay the mistake by ordering the corect equiprnent and resuming the Ecuipment and tne Customer obtains a Returned Materials Authorization number (RMA #") trom Western Multiplex prior to reiurning any Equipment. 10.3 Western Multiplex reserves the right to charge a fee for retumec equipment under Subparagraph 1.2(bj with the amount of the fee being determined pricr to an RMA # being given by VWesterr Multip:ex, 10.4 Authonzed returns of equipment under Paragrapn 10.2 must be ir an undamaged condition, in the original configuration, in the origina. packing materials and witnin a time peried agreed to wher the RMA # was issued 18.5 If the Customer does no! comply with the provis:ons of Paragraphs 40.2, 10.3, and 10.4, the Customer shall pay the full amount of the Invoice. 16.6 The party liable for all shipping, insurance and any other expenses incurred by the Customer in returning the Equipment under Paragraph 10.2 and for all toss or damage to the Equipment until received by Wester Multiplex, shall be: (a for all items returned under Subparagraoh 10.2(a). Western Multiplex and (b) for all items resumed under Surparagrap 10 2/6), the Customer. CANCELLATION 11.1 If the Customer cancels ar. order before the Shipping Sate, Western Mulliptex reserves tye righ: to charge the Cusiomer a cancellation, charge up to 100% of the amount of the order 11.2 The Customer shail pay al: cancellation charges within thirty (30) days from date of tne Invoice FORCE MAJEURE 42.1 Wester Multiplex shall not be liable if iis performance of the Agreenen: becomes commercially impractical due to any contingency beyond Western Muttipiex's reasonable control, including acts of God, fires, floods, wars, sabotage, civil unrest, accidents. labor disputes or shoriages, government laws, rules and regulations, whether vaiid or invalid, inability to ebtain material, equipment ov transportation, incorrect, delayed or incomplete specifications, drawings or data supplied by the Customer or others (collectively "Forse Majeure). In no event of Force Majeure shall Westerr Multiplex be required to purchase goods from oiners te enable it to deliver the Equipment under the Agreement ENGINEERING AND SYSTEM DESIGN 13.1 The Customer is solely responsible for the engineering, design, integration and norma! preventative and remedia! maintenance of ihe Customers system for which Western Multiplex supplies Equipment 13.2 Western Multiplex is not responsible for the satsfactory operation of the Equipment in conjunction with other manufacturer's equigment, nor for any tosses which may cccur as a result of a failure of tne Equioment to operate in conjunction with other manufacturers equipment. WARRANTY 14.1 All Equipment is covered by tne Warranty. 14.2 THE WARRANTY CONTAINS LIMITATIONS ON THE CUSTOMER'S RIGHTS AND REMEDIES AGAINST WESTERN MULTIPLEX UNDER THE AGREEMENT. THE CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES HAVING READ, UNDERSTOOD AND AGREED TO THOSE LIMITATIONS. WICS97-1 viti INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF AGREEMENT 18.4 H ether party is successfu' in any litigatior between the parties based or the Agreemen:, the successful party shall recover from the other, in addition to direct damages, the successful party's reasonable attomeys fees and otner costs of litigation INSOLVENCY OF CUSTOMER, ETC. 16."
Western Multiplex may cancel the Agreement anc suspenc any further deliveries ender the Agreemen: without any liability te the Customer. and, if Equipment has beer delivered bu: not paid for the price snall become immediately due and payable despite any other agreement to the contrary if any proceedings in bankruptcy, insolvency, receivership or liquidation are taker against the Customer:
the Customer makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors cr commits an act of bankruptcy or insolvency the Customer ceases, or tnreatens to cease, to carry on the ordinary Course of its business, or transfers all or substantially al. oF Its property the Equipment is seized under any egal process or confiscated; o Western Multiplex in good faith be ieves that the ability of the Customer to pay or perform any provision of the Agreement is impaired, cr that any of the events mentioned above is about tc OCCU. NOTICE 47.4 Al. requests. instructions and notices from one party to the otner must be in writing and may be given via registered post or facsimile transmission 10 the address of the parties shown on the Quotation or Order Acknowledgment. EXPORT PROVISIONS 418.4 The Customer snall not, whether directly or indirectly dinclucing facilitating a third party} export or re-expox the Equipment outside the country in wnicn the Customer has stated these items are to be usec without obtaining the licenses required under ail applicable rules. Fhe Customer shall inoemnify Western Multiplex against any liadility incuted oy Westem Multiplex due to any violation by tne Customer of any of the provisions of this Section, but this indemnity sna not apply if the Customer reasonably relies on information supplied to it by Western Multiplex with respect to export licenses. Upon receipt of 2 governmental consent to export tne receiving party shall immediately notify the other in writing MISCELLANEOUS. 19.4 19.2 19.3 194 19.6 No waiver by Western Multiplex of any breach of this Agreemen. Shall be considered as a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other provision Any provision af tne Agreement which is, or is deemed to be Unenforceable in any Jurisdiction shall be severable from tne Agreement in that jurisdiction without in any way invalidating tne remaining portions of the Agreament, and that unenforceability shall not make that provision unenforceabie in any other Jursdiction The rights which accrue to Wester Multiplex by virtue of the Agreement shall irure for the benefit of and be binding upon tne successors and assigns cf Wesiem Multipiex. The agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Califomia including the California Uniferm Commercia! Code. However Western Multiplex may enforce the provisions of tne Agreement in accordance with the laws of the jurisdiction in which the Equipments situated The United Nations Convention on the Sale of Goods (The Vienna Convention) shall no: apply to the Agreement Les parties ont exigs aue cette entente soil rdige en arglais. rrr INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
. WESTERN JULY 2000 Multiplex j an ee) q Table of Contents J. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ww. csssessccsescsscessstisnsecccsenressstanerssscennsecceenestsunnorsccccconpevenmmavecassossestaseessanvamnssees 1-1 L. i. 2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION... 2.2 SPECIFICATIONS .. th he bo 1 MANUAL ORGANIZATION. 2 ICONS . Transmitter coseseerveeeeenes Antenna f Antenna Coupling Uni 2.2.3 Receiver .. 2.2.4 Sysiena (Single Hop Performance). 22.5 Line Interfaces 22.6 Auxitiary Connections. 2.2.7 Temperature and Environment 2.2.8 Power... 2.2.9 Regulatory Information . 2.2.10 Mechanical... ve 2.3 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION 23.4 General... 2.3.2 Test Points / Power Indicator. 2.3.3 Alarm and Status Indicators 23.4 COITONS woes cceeeeccstete cece rsnes 23.5 Connections ....00.... 2.4 REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION... 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES .... 3. INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS.......... 3.1 SHIPPING CONTAINER... seven 3.2 PACKING ITEMS IDENTIFICATION -
3.3 BEFORE INSTALLATION TASK LIST.. 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 23.8 3.4 TOOLS REQUIRED... 3.5 FREQUENCY CHANNEL PLANS Site Selection Requirements... Line-of-Sight and Path Clearance Guidelines RSL Calculation and Link Budget . Fade Margin Calculation . Availability Catculation.... Frequency Plan Determination .. Power Supply Planning . Antena Planning .......... 3.6 MOUNTING THE TSUNAMI oc seeeccesceee 3.7 POWER CONNECTION AND WIRING.. LE 7.2 3 3, 80 ANTENNA CONNECTION ......... 9 TRANSMISSION LINE CONNECTION wos cescesccceceeccsceneecsteseenesesiseeeccecanrsiceeanenscerenmensecsmescscsneaceacaneecsareaes sites DC Power Wiring... AC Power Connection . TOC & INTRODUCTION INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL vie
, WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDOES Multiplex JULY 2000 3.10 ANTENNA INSTALLATION & ALIGNMENT .occcsccsssssvnssnsststesisteesiiteneese 3.11 ETHERNET INTERFACE CONNECTION.. 3.12 SYSTEM TURN-UP TO SERVICE ......... 3.13 OUTPUT POWER ADIUSTMERT . 3.14 ADDITIONAL CONNECTIONS... 3/47 Orderwire Connection. 3.i4.2 Alarm Connections 3.44.3 Configuration Port Operation oe 3444 AUX DATA (Digital Service Chanel; Connection. 3.44.5 TF (DSX-1) Interface Connection . te . 3.14.6 CEPT-] (1) InterfaceCannection 3-35 3.14.7 NMS Interface Connection... 4. REGULAR MAINTENANCE... 4.2 CHANGING FREQUENCY PLANS 43 USING A SPARE TERMINAL. 44 TECHNICAL SUPPORT .. 4.5 REPAIR POLICY.. we 4.6 FRONT PANEL STATUS LEDS 4.67 RF LINK Aiarm....... 4.6.2 RADIO FAIL Alarm 4.6.3 FAR END Alarm. 4.7 ERRORS IN THE DATA STREAM. 4.8 INTERFERENCE COUNTERMEASURES 48] Use of a Spectrum Analyzer ie Evaluate Potential Inierference.. 49 BACK-TO-BACK TESTING ....cceeccecccseecescsenesseecaeseneeeenenee 4.10 LINK TESTING.. 4.11 NETWORK MAN AGEMENT SYSTEM (NMS) . 4.117 0 SNMP oo. 4.31.2 Browser GUI. 4.11.3 In-band NMS Set-up .. 4.11.4 Software Update Download Procedure FADS TORO ee cence eee snc veaneeneenneeesenees APPENDICES... APPENDIX A - DIGITAL INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS .. J, General Characteristics... cece tvs 2. Specifications. APPENDIX B JOOBASET al AND ) 1OBASET CONNECTIONS APPENDIX C NETWORKING Q&AS. APPENDIX D AUXILIARY DATA CONNECTORS TOC & INTRODUCTION INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES , We 5 TERN JULY 2000 Multiplex Figures FIGURE 2-1: FRONT PANEL ....ceeeccceeereeneeeaees wi 29 FIGURE 3-1: CHANNEL PLANS, DUAL-BAND (45 MBPS) ....cescccscsssesccsssnecsarssmecseersenessereeserssssennevessnerssessaersassesaresneend 71 FIGURE 3-2: CHANNEL PLAN, SINGLE-BAND (45 MBPS) . 0 FIGURE 3-3: CHANNEL PLAN, SINGLE-BAND (100 MBPS) .. 0 FIGURE 3-3: NEGATIVE VOLTAGE DC CONNECTION 4 FIGURE 3-5: POSITIVE VOLTAGE DC CONNECTION .. 4 FIGURE 3-6: AC CONNECTION .....cscecsecescseceeesccereersseeeesescsesceseaneneaescanseaseseseeaeens 3-158 FIGURE 3-7: TYPICAL RSL VOLTAGE VERSUS RECEIVED SIGNAL LEVEL (RSL) 3-20 FIGURE 3-8: TYPICAL RF OUTPUT POWER VERSUS PWR VOLTAGE 3-24 FIGURE 3-9: ORDERWIRE & VF PORT CONNECTION.... 3-30 FIGURE 3-10: PIN CONNECTIONS, ALARM INTERFACE .. 331 FIGURE 3-11: RS-232 CONFIG PORT CONNECTIONS .... 1333 FIGURE 4-1: BACK-TO-BACK TEST CONFIGURATION
T mo FIGURE 4-2: END-TO-END TEST CONFIGURATION FIGURE B-1: FAST ETHERNET & ETHERNET NMS CONNECTORS o.oo. ccccsseecececeennsendaeeconeenss cette sities ereanres gunners FIGURE D-1: VF PORT CONNECTION ........ FIGURE D-2: ALARM PORT CONNECTIONS... 5-18 FIGURE D-3: CONFIG({URATION) PORT 9-PIN D-STYLE CONNECTOR .. 5-18 FIGURE D-4: AUX DATA PORT 9-PIN D-STYLE CONNECTOR .... 5-19 Tables TABLE 3-A: DC POWER CONNECTION FOR NEGATIVE SUPPLY, 3-12 TABLE 3-B: DC POWER CONNECTION FOR POSITIVE SUPPLY 3-12 TABLE 3-C: TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER ADJUSTMENT . 3-27 TABLE 3-D: ALARM INTERFACE CONNECTIONS.....c000006+ 13-32 TABLE A- 1: INTERCONNECTION SPECIFICATION ....:sssccccssseesteseeeecesereseeseteeeseereceneessaaesenessanseeeisecseeesseaatssaimanesssanerssese del i AS TOC & INTRODUCTION iti Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex 1. How to Use This Manual 1.1. Manuai Organization The Installation and Maintenance Manual provides information required to install and maintain Tsunami and to use its many features to the fullest advantage. This manual is divided into the following sections:
Section 1 Provides instructions on how to most effectively utilize the information in this manual. Section 2 Provides a brief description and specifications of the Tsunami. Section 3 Explains the Tsunami installation and adjustments in detail Section 4 Provides maintenance, repair and troubleshooting information for the Tsunami Fast Ethernet radios. Appendices Charts and diagrams are provided for radio connections and DIP switch settings along with other general information. EE This device must be professionally installed. instructions on setting the transmitter RF output power are contained in Section 3 of this Manual. oe This device is to be used exciusively for fixed point-to-point Ke operation that employs directional antennas. nr SECTION 1: HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL PAGE 1-1 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Tsunami FAMILY WE 5 TERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2600 1.2 Icons Throughout this manual, the foliowing icons are used to highlight areas of special interest and importance. cS Y @
Note Practical Tip Caution rr PAGE 1-2 SECTION 1: HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WE s TERN Multiplex JULY 2000 2. Product Description 2.1. General Description The Tsunami license-free radios provide a new level of control and convenience in a digital communications network These Tsunami radios provide 100BaseT intelligent bridging between two locations without the delay and expense of installing cable or traditionai microwave. Because each owner controis the operation of the link, there is no reliance on any outside services. Tsunami radio operators are able to operate instant links whenever needed, and to be in control of their own network. The Tsunami offers two primary benefits:
CONVENIENCE Easy to install and operate with no user license requirements or frequency coordination in the USA.
(Other countries may require a user license and/or frequency coordination). CAPABILITY Full transparent Fast Ethernet connections with no throughput reduction over any line-of-sight distance (within legal limits of government regulation) cS Tsunami radios are |SO Layer 2 Data Link Layer (use MAC address for filtering) devices where they provide their full stated throughput. At level 2 (bridges) or 3/4 (routers) where hardware plays the major part, the most common tester is the SmartBits 200 product from NetCom Systems. At Application Layer 7, you will see less than 40% throughput from the maximum capacity measured with SmartBits due to the increased protocolfsottware overhead at that level. Layer 7 can be tested with software such as Ganymede's Chariot or Qcheck product (www.qcheck.net/index.himl. Use Qcheck (or equivalent), do NOT use PING for throughput testing (www.qcheck.netAwhyqcheck. html)!
As an example: testing copper CAT5 cable with SmartBits will test 100% throughput (let's say you can send/rcy a full JOOMbps}. At Layer 7 you will be transferring bits at the 100Mbps rate, but approximately only 45Mbps of user data will transfer (Ethernet has a high overhead of bytes added to each data packet frame each time you go up a layer). The advantage is the more complex overhead makes the data virtually resilient to corruption and minor errors (i.. collisions), it's easy to reroute and the network can use inexpensive plug/play devices like hubs/switches instead of multiplexers as used in the telco industry (Le. LYNX T1/E1/D$3 radios) Western Multiolex tests for stated throughput at Layer 2/3 where bridges are defined. At layer 7
{application layer), you may see less than 50% or more depending on the other traffic that may be on the LAN as this layer is more dependent on the type of data being sent {it does not matter if it's wire. fiber or any Ethernet bridge -wired or wireless). Another way to look at it: the model 31145 12Mbps
(10Mbps 10BaseT+T1/E1 wayside) bridge will test the same as a piece of CAT5 Ethernet cable. SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-1 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 2.2 Specifications ce
= Ali specifications are subject to change without notice. 2.2.1 Transmitter Frequency Selection NMS selection with installer-removable 7-cavity RF fitter assembly 45 Mbps Models 100 Mbps Model
| Frequency Dual-Band Single-Band Dual-Band
"AI 5284 MHz 5750 MHz 5300 MHz A2 5759 MHz 5800 MHz 8775 MHz
| Bt 5316 MHz NIA B2 5791 MHz N/A Output Power +10/417 dBm +17 dBm +10/+17 dBm
(Note: output power.is specified as guaranteed minimum before attenuation) Controt Range 16 dB min. 18 dB min. 16 dB min.
DO NOT exceed the transmit power setting as set at the factory! Exceeding
@ the factory-set power evel will degrade the specifications of the radio and may aiso violate regulatory compliance. Output power may be attenuated from factory setting to comply with regulatory EIRP limits, eere PAGE 2-2 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL JULY 2000 2.2.2. Antenna / Antenna Coupling Unit WESTERN Multiplex Mechanics Antenna Connection Impedance Recommended Antenna (ordered separately) Gain & Beamwidth (3 dB) Extemal antenna N-type female 50 ohms 41, of 2 foot flat panel or 2, 4 or 6 foot parabolic 1 ft Flat 23.5 dB/ 9 2 ft Flat 28 dB I 4.6 2 ft Parabolic 28.5 dB / 6 i 4 ft Parabolic 35 cB /3 6 ft Parabolic 38 dB /2.9 2.2.3 Receiver All Models Nominal Receive Level -30 to -60 dBm Maximum.Receive Level Frequency Selection Threshold Rx Level (typ.)
(BER = 10%) Frequency Range Dual-band low channel Dual-band high channel Single-band channel
-30 dBm error free, 0 dBm no damage Craft port selection -with installer-removable 7-cavity RF filter assembly
-80 dBm 260-5350 MHz 5725-5825 MHz 5725-5825 MHz SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION eT PAGE 2-3 FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. WESTERN Tsunami FAMILY Multiplex JULY 2000 2.2.4 System (Single Hop Performance) Error Floor 107"
Transmission delay i
(radio only) 250 psec, maximum
(10 mile path} 300 psec, maximum Transmit Frequencies 45 Mbps Models 400 Mbps Model Dual-band Single-band Dual-band A channel 284 MHz 5750MHz 5300 MHz A2 channel 5789 MHz 5800 MHz 5775 MHz Bi channel 5316 MHz N/A N/A i B2 channel 5791 MHz N/A NA Receive Frequencies Dual-band Single-band Dual-band Ai channel 5759 MHz 5800 MHz 5775 MHz A2 channel 5284 MHz $750 MHz $300 MHz B1 channet 5791 MHz NIA NIA B2 channel 5318 MHz NIA NIA ee PAGE 2-4 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES , WE 5 TERN Multiplex JULY 2000 2.2.5 Line Interfaces Fast Ethernet Port:
Data Interface 100BaseT (fully compatible with IEEE 802.3u) Connectors RJ-45/48c (wire) SC (fiber) 1306nm multimode te 2000m Configuration Half duplex or full duplex on the WAN interface .
| Filtering / 15,000 packets per second theoretical, before forwarding
| Buffer 4000 packets (200 kbytes) i LAN Table 1,024 MAC addresses Selt-learning Automatic learning and aging Digital Capacity ~45 Mbps full or half duplex (90 Mbps total}
DS-1 (T1) Port: (on T1 wayside models with 41 suffix) Data Rate 1.544 Mbps |
Digital Interface * DSxX-1 Connector 8-pin modular jack female (RJ-48C) Line Code AMI /B8ZS (NMS selectable) Line Build Out 0-660 feet (NMS selectable) Blue Code * Alarm Indication Signa! (AlS}
; Loopback Near or far end (NMS selectable)
* Meets AT&T Pub 62411, Belicore TR-TSY-000499
** Signal is selectable (on/off) and is generated only on data loss or link failure when enabled. re SECTION:2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-5 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 CEPT (E1} Port: (on E1 wayside modeis with ~42 suffix) Data Rate 2.048 Mbps |
Digital interface * CEPT-1 Connector RJ45/8 balanced, 120 ohm
(optional 75 ohm, unbalanced balun available) Line Code HDB3 Biue Code ** Alarm Indication Signal (AlS}
*' Meets ITU-T G.703.
** Signal is selectable (on/off) and is generated only on data loss or link failure when selected.
' Remote Loopback Internal or external test. signal (rear panel DIP switch selectable) 2.2.6 Auxiliary Connections Orderwire Interface 2-wire, 4-pin' modular jack, female (RJ-11}
REN (Ringer. Equivalency Number) 1.0B DTMF tones within 21.5% of nominal freq. (+0-6 dB}
Ringing Voltage 48 VDC, typical
(use telephones with solid staie ringers, NOT adequate for older style mechanical ringers) VF Orderwire Bridge 600 ohm balanced, 4-wire, 0 dBm, DB-S, male Config{uration) Port RS-232, DB-9, male Aux Data (clear service channel) RS-232, <9600 baud, DB-9, femaie |
Alarm 2x Form C, DB-9. female Test Points Output Power :
Near-end and far-end received signal level (RSL) 10BaseT NMS Ethernet Port:
Data Interface 10BaseT Connectors RJ-45/48c (wire) Configuration Half duplex PAGE 2-6 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Tsunami FAMILY . w FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES E s TERN Multiplex INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (
JULY 2000 2.2.7. Temperature and Environment Operating Temperature Range A Oto. 450C Humidity : J 95% non-condensing Altitude 4,500 meters, maximum 2.2.8 Power DC Input Voltage Oe 20 to 263, VDC : j Power Consumption : x oe -< 55 watts AC faaineer (eptional) yo0-250.VAG. 80-6042 Connector : Barrier strip, plug-in type 2.2.9 Regulatory Information
: ; Duakband= 45 Mops... Single-band.... 100 Mbps. Dual-band PCC identifier. HZB-US368-45 HZB-U58-45 = HZB-U5358-100 FOC Rule Pans 18:407 (UNI) *5.407 (UNI) 48407 (UNI):
"Industry Canada ID Teo 5221021581A TED IC RulePats == RSS. 210 (LE-LAN) ASS-210-(LE-LAN) AS-210 (LE-LAN) 2.2.10 Mechanical Width (for 19-inch EIA Lee 437:mm (17.2') rack mounting brackets supplied i Taek mounting) 22 : : a eee : :
Heigtt "89mm (3.5") @RU) Depth 9 ~ 368mm (14.5") |
Weight a : 5'kg. (17 Ibs.) |
SECTION 2; PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-7 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Tsunami FAMILY WESTER N FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 2.3. Front Panel Description 2.3.1 General The Tsunami radio front panel (no user access on rear panel), as shown in Figure 2-1, has LED indicators, test points, controls and connections that are used for installation, maintenance, operation and troubleshooting. Prior to installation, it is best to be familiar with the front panel of your particular model. Sections 2.3.2 through 2.3.5 briefly describe the front panel access and indicators. Q ror, Gam Orem Qoow Figure 2-1: Front Panel en PAGE 2-8 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL -
Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES We 5 TERN Multiplex JULY 2000 2.3.2 Test Points / Power Indicator ON This is an LED indication. When jit GREEN, Tsunami is powered. The Tsunami radio products do not have an on/off switch. GND This is a test point referenced to chassis ground. This is used in conjunction with the next two test points to measure voltages related to radio performance. RSL This is a test point that relates to the Received Signal Level (RSL). The voltage is measured with a voltmeter (using the GND test point for reference) which corresponds to the actual power level of the incoming received signal. While the DISPLAY FAA END button is pressed, this RSL voltage corresponds to the RSL of the far-end radio. These measurements are used during installation, maintenance and troubleshooting. Refer to Figure 3-6 in Section 3-20. LOCAL This is a test point which corresponds to the output transmit power of the radio. The TX PWR voitage is measured with a voltmeter (using the GND test point for reference) which corresponds to the actual power level of the outgoing signal. This measurement is used during instaliation, maintenance and troubleshooting ecm This voltage only applies to the near-end and does not allow measurement Ke of the far-end output transmit power, even when the DISPLAY FAR END button is pressed. There is a receptacte on the front panel to the right of the LOCAL TX PWR test point which is an installation adjustment allowing the output transmit power to be increased or decreased within the radio's specified limits. Using a small screwdriver, this adjustment is used to set the output power of the transmitter, in accordance to the path planning. The Tsunami system requires professional installation. Transmitted output
@ power limits may apply when using this radio. Consult FCC, IC, Western Multiplex or other regulatory authorities for limits which may apply. See Section 3.13.1 for details on setting output power. Do not adjust output power above factory settings. me SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-9 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Gi) wester JULY 2000 2.3.3 Alarm and Status Indicators Radio Fail Green = Radio hardware O.K. Red = Hardware failure detected RF Link Green = Error-free operation Yellow = Bit errors occurring
: Red = Excessive bit errors or radio link failure Flashing = Link security ID mismatch
| TXD Green = 100BaseT data transmit present Yellow = 100BaseT port connected (no data present) Off = No 100BaseT connection detected RXD Green = 100BaseT data receive present Yellow = 100BaseT port connected (no data present) Off = No 100BaseT connection detected COLL Yellow = Collisions occurring on 100BaseT (half-duplex mode) FAR END Red = Alarm(s) present on the far-end radio*
NMS (10BaseT) | Green = Tx or Rx data present on the NMS interface Yeliow = NMS interface connected (no data present) Off = No NMS interface connection detected Ti (INPUT Green = Alarm enabled and T1 connection detected Red = Alarm enabled and no T1 connection detected Yellow = Alarm disabled and T1 connection detected
| Off = Alarm disabled and no T1 connection detected
** Radio Fail, RF Link (yellow or red), T1 Input (yellow or red) PAGE 2-10 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WE 5s TERN JULY 2000 Multiplex 2.3.4 Controls DISPLAY This push-button provides the capability to determine alarms and status of the far-
FAR END end radio, When pressed and held, the alarm and status LEDs and the RSL test point correspond to the far-end radios status and RSL value. This can be used for installation, maintenance and troubleshooting. When the LED on this switch is flashing, no tar-end information is available. This typically indicates that there is no link between near-end and far-end radios. ee SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-11 G INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 2.3.5 Connections RF CONNECTION The RF port of the Tsunami radio is an N-type female connector that is an integral part of the filter assembly. The filter assembly occupies nearly the entire top half of the front panel. The N-Type connector is used to connect the antenna, typically using coaxial transmission line. In some cases, waveguide may be used as the primary transmission line, in which case a waveguide-to-N adapter is required. For the Tsunami, 1/2" or 5/8 coaxial cable {LDF4-50 or LDF4,5-50) is recommended. Coaxial cable that is 7/8 or larger can exhibit moding at 5.8 GHz and is not recommended for 5.8 GHz radios. For waveguide transmission line at 5.8 GHz, EW-52 waveguide is recommended. EW-63 will also work, but may exhibit more loss. DATA CONNECTION The connection for the Fast Ethernet interface that carries the signals in and out of the radio is an RJ45 100BaseT wire connection or ST 100BaseT fiber connection. DC POWER CONNECTION The input accepts positive or negative DC power al any voltage between 20 and 63 Volts. Optionally, an AC power adapter can be used. OPTIONAL CONNECTIONS There are several connections that are not required tor operation, but provide additional facilities to the user. EOW This connection is used to access the electronic orderwire function. This is a facility for "telephone" style service from one radio to another. A standard electronic telephone [one with a handset and DTMF (push-button tone) dialing] plugs into this connector. The user can dial the orderwire address of the far-end radio (or any radio in the Tsunami network) to establish telephone communication between sites. This communication does not interrupt or interiere with the other radio communications. The radio link must be operational to use this facility. The orderwire feature can be very useful for installation, maintenance and troubleshooting. This connector is used to link two Tsunami radios at a repeater site for Orderwire operation. This would allow orderwire "telephone" calls to and from any point in the Tsunami network. VF nee The Tsunami orderwire circuit can also be connected to other existing ip: orderwire networks. See Section 3.14.1 for details. ALARM This connecter is used tor monitoring alarms electrically. The Form C relays can be connected to other transmission equipment for monitoring alarm status locally or remotely. PAGE 2-12 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 6 Multiplex CONFIG This is a serial intertace port (RS-232) to the Tsunami radio. This port provides configuration and maintenance information about the Tsunami radio(s) to a connected computer or terminal. Consult factory for operation. AUX This is a serial interface port (RS-232, <9600 baud} which allows the user to connect DATA auxiliary serial data from one point in the radio network to another. it can be used for separate data connection for serial devices. 10BaseT = This is an Ethemet connection for access to the Tsunami NMS (SNMP or HTML). NMS See section 4.11 for more detail for operation. T1 This is a wayside data channel for T1 (DS-1) interface of auxiliary traffic (277X0-571 Models). E1 This is a wayside data channel for E1 (CEPT-1) interface of auxiliary traffic (277X0-52 Madels). er LD SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-13 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL fe Tsunami FAMILY G WEST E RN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS SRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 2.4 Rear Panel Description The Tsunami radio rear panel, is blank. All connections and incications are on the front panel for single panel access a PAGE 2-14 SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BAIDGES WE 5 TERN Multiplex JULY 20006 2.5 Installation Accessories The Tsunami radio is shipped with several accessories commonly required for the radio as described below:
AC Power if ordered as an option, this power supply provides AC lo DC conversion for use Supply with AC powered locations. AC Power This power cord connects the AC Power Supply, if ordered, to a standard 115V Cord U.S. AC outlet. Rack Meunt Two brackets (along with required mounting screws} are provided which allow 19-
Brackets inch rack mounting of the Tsunami radio. Terminal This is a 6-pin mating connector used for DC power supply. Connector D Four of these mating connectors are provided. One is used for the VF port, one for Connector the CONFIG port, one for the ALARMS port and one for the AUX DATA port.
@pin RF Power A smail plastic cap is provided which is placed over the RF output power Adjustment adjustment receptacle once output power has been set by professional installation Cover personnel. Do not adjust the power higher than the factory setting! Before setting the power level lower, note the factory setting or keep the radio's configuration sheet attached for future reference. Other accessories are available, such as orderwire handsets, connector adapters and special cables. These can be ordered separately upon request. i SECTION 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PAGE 2-15 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN Multiplex 3. Installation & Adjustments 3.1 Shipping Container The equipment is shipped in boxes unless ordered as an integrated system and contigured at the factory, in which case the equipment may be racked and shipped in a crate. The equipment is packaged so as to prevent damage in transit. The boxes should be left intact and sheltered until arrival at the installation site. If the shipping container shows signs of damage, the
@ transportation company should be notified immediately. Extra care and inspection of the contents is advised immediately upon receipt, It is recommended that all the packaging materials be
. retained. in the unlikely event that the equipment must be ty returned to the factory, use the original packing materials for
. Yo retum shipment. The original packaging materials are also recommended for transporting the equipment from location to location. Inside the primary shipping containers, internal boxes may contain other items. These boxes should also be saved for future use. Also, save the Tsunamf radio test data sheet that is provided. The test data sheet can be placed where the Tsunami terminal will be installed tor future quick reference. All Tsunami units are we individually tested and the actual- measured performance oy: recorded on the Factory Test Data Sheet. You will find this information to be of use during installation, troubleshooting and maintenance. A set of quick instailation instructions is also provided which can be useful for easy reference during installation. a SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-1 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY WESTE RN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 3.2 Packing ltems Identification The primary shipping container houses the radio along with other items including:
* This manual
+ Installation accessory kit (see Section 2.5) i PAGE 3-2 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (
Multiplex 3.3 Before Installation Task List There are several tasks that should be accomplished prior to installing the Tsunami radio system. This section briefly describes the following:
- Site selection
- Line-of-Sight and Path Clearance determination
- Anticipated RSL calculation
- Fade margin caiculation
- Availability catculation
- Frequency plan determination
- Power supply planning
- Antenna (and accessories) purchase Only directional antennas should be used with Tsunami radios. These are typically flat panel or solid parabolic antennas.
@ Western Muitiplex recommends a maximum beamwidth of 10 degrees for directional systems. 3.3.1 Site Selection Requirements The radio site must have:
- access te the appropriate power
- close proximity to the telephone or computer system you wish to interconnect
- line-of-sight to the other radio location with adequate clearance
- location for mounting the antenna i SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS + PAGE 3-3 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 3.3.2 Line-of-Sight and Path Clearance Guidelines The Tsunami radios will not operate properly unless they have line-of-sight between their corresponding antennas. The Tsunami radio transmission will not pass through trees or other obstacles. Factors to consider include:
- Earth curvature
- Future growth of trees
- Height of buildings in addition to the line-of-sight requirement, a weil-engineered path will also have additional path clearance to allow for signal loss due to partial obstructions, atmospheric ducting and ground reflections. Te maximize radio reception, 0.6 times the first Fresnel zone should be calculated and this distance added to the path clearance (in addition to trees or buildings). a PAGE 3-4 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (
Multiplex 3.3.3. RSL Calculation and Link Budget The received signal level (RSL) can be estimated using the following formula:
RSL (dBm) = P,,- FL,+ G, +G,- FL, -L, where: P.,, is the transmitter output power (in dBm) FL, is the feeder loss of the transmit side (in dB) G, is the gain of the transmit antenna (in dB) G, is the gain of the receive antenna {in dB) FL, is the feeder loss of the receive side (in dB) L is the Path loss, defined by:
L, (dB) = 96.6 + 20 log,,F + 20 log, .D where: F = Frequency in GHz (2.4 or 5.8) D = Distance of path in miles This link budget is very important for determining any potential problems during installation. If you have calculated the expected RSL, you can see if it has been achieved during installation, and troubleshoot if necessary. In the USA and Canada, Tsunami radios may be installed with any gain directional antennas but with a total system limit of +30 dbm EIRP for the 5.3 GHz transmitter
@ channel frequencies. 5.8 GHz transmitters have an EIRP limit of +53 dBm. For the equation above, replace the P,, - FL,+ G, by the EIRP limit. rr re SECTION & INSTALLATION & ADUUSTMENTS: PAGE 3-5 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 3.3.4 Fade Margin Calculation The fade margin is the difference between the actual received signal and the radios threshold. Using the formula provided in Section 3.3.3, the anticipated RSL can be calculated. Compare this RSL to the specified threshold of the Tsunami radio (shown in Section 2.2) and calculate the fade margin as the difference between the two signal levels. 3.3.5 Availability Calculation Availability of the microwave path is a measure of the percent of the time that the link will operate without producing an excessive BER due to multipath facing. In the absence of direct interference, avaitability is affected by the following: ,
~ Path length
- Fade margin
- Frequency (5.3 or 5.8 GHz in the case of these Tsunami radios)
- Terrain (smooth, average, mountainous)
- Climate (dry, temperate, hot/humid) Depending on the type of traffic carried over the link, the system designer may wish to design for
@ specific availability. For example, if the data or voice traffic that is carried by the radio is critical then it may be designed for a very high availability (e.g. 99.999% or 5.3 minutes of outage per year). To improve availability, for example, the fade margin can be increased by making the path shorter, or by using higher gain antennas in conjunction with lower loss feeders (by using high quality ttansmission fine or shortening feed length). Oa See PAGE 3-6 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS 8RIDGES We s TERN JULY 2000 Multiplex 3.3.6 Frequency Plan Determination When configuring radios in a hub or repeater configuration, careful engineering of the Tsunami radio frequency plans and antenna locations shouid be performed in order to minimize potential interference between the nearby radios. As a rule of thumb, do not place identical frequency plan radios (e.g. two A channel radios) at the same site. In most cases, it is desirable to use a different frequency pian (e.g. A versus 8). However, with careful engineering, placing more than one radio of the same frequency channel! pian at the same site is easily accomplished. In fact, the Tsunami frequency pian is designed to allow complex hub configurations that may require re-
using the same frequency plan. When designing these types of configurations, antenna size and antenna location are critical. If identical channel plans must be used at the same site, the same radio channel (e.g. A1 and At) should be used at a site to minimize interference. Using alternate channels (e.g. Al and A2) is less likely to be successful (and therefore not recommended) due to the high level of transmitter to receiver isolation required from the antenna system. Sometimes it is required to locate the Tsunami radio nearby a transmitter that is the same as, or close to the Tsunami receive or transmit frequencies. In this case, the Tsunami terminal that should be placed closest to this interfering transmitter should be the specific terminal with the receive frequency which is furthest from this unwanted transmitted frequency. This approach minimizes the potential of interference. While interference conditions are rare when using the Tsunami radios, cases of interference may be overcome by exchanging the radios from end to end or simply reinstalling a different filter unit (if applicable), as described in Section 4.2. In some cases, changing frequency plans (e.g. from A to B) can also help mitigate any interference. SSS Section 4.8 of this manual describes interference Ie countermeasures in further detail. SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-7 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES G INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 3.3.7. Power Supply Planning The Tsunami tadio must have access to a supply of appropriate power, either DC or AC (if the AC adapter option has been ordered). The Tsunami can be powered from a DC battery system, or from a solar or generator power plant, usually with battery reserves. Typically either a positive or negative ground 24 or 48 volt supply is used. For DC, be sure the cable is of sufficient gauge to carry the necessary current and it is less than three (3) meters (9.75 feet) in length. Before installing the radio, plan for the continuous power consumption needs in accordance with the specifications given in Section 2.2 of this manual. It is also wise to plan for backup power for critical communication circuits (including the Tsunami radio). Backup power allows the radios and associated equipment to continue operation when primary power is interrupted. 3.3.8 Anienna Planning Using path planning mathematics, proper antenna size can be determined which will yield the desired path performance. In general, the larger the antenna that is used with the Tsunamf radio, the better the link will perform. Larger antennas have narrower beamwidth and higher gain, which will yieid better link performance (higher fade margin, betier availability) and improve immunity to interference (due to the smatler beamwidths), However, larger antennas are more costly to purchase and install than smalier antennas, in some cases requiring special equipment for installation. All of these factors should be taken into consideration when selecting antennas. use of larger antennas will maintain the benefit of narrow beamwiaths and receive gain. However, oujput power may need io be reduced to meet regulations. (See Section 3.13.1)
@ in areas where transmitted output power restrictions apply, the Prior to installation, the specific antenna location and mounting should be determined. This advanced planning also yields the transmission line requirements. Only directional antennas should be used with Tsunami radios. These can be flat panei or solid parabolic antennas. ee PAGE 3-8 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . WESTE FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 RN Multiplex 3.4 Tools Required The following tools may be required for the installation of the Tsunami radios:
Phillips (cross tip) screwdrivers (for 19-inch rack mounting and attachment of brackets) Small blade standard screwdriver (for. power supply connector and RF output power adjust) Soldering iron (if using any D-type connectors) Wire strippers (for removing insulation from power supply and other wiring) Wire crimpers (if using any RJ-style connectors that aren't pre-made}
Digital Voitmeter (to measure RSL, Tx output power, Alarms) The following tools are recommended for the installation of the Tsunami radios:
RF power meter (to measure transmitter output power) Cellular phone or two-way radio (for talking with far-end crew and tower crew) Bit Error Rate test set (to test link after installation) Computer (for NMS access with 10BaseT interface and cable) Touch-tone Telephone (to test orderwire circuits and for communication with far-end) Additional too!s will likely be needed for antenna and transmission tine installation and antenna alignment. Consult Sections 3.8 through 3.10 of this manual for more details.
*Telephone connection specifications:
REN (Ringer Equivalency Number) . 108 DTMF tones within +1.5% of nominal freq. Ringing Voltage 48 VDC, typical
(Ringing voltage is adequate for modern solid state ringers, NOT for the older mechanical type ringers) eeeeeeEeeeSSSSSSeeeeESSSSFSFSSSMMFMMMMee SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-9
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 3.5 Frequency Channel Plans The Tsunami system offers non-overlapping channel plans. This channel! plan arrangement allows users to implement Tsunami systems in the proximity of other Tsunami radios (pianned or unplanned), hub and repeater applications, and can be used to mitigate interference. The channe!
plans are illustrated below in Figures 3-1 through 3-2. Section 4.2 and 4.3 describe how to change frequency channel assignments of a Tsunami radio. 5316 5725 5759 5791 5250 5825 Frequency (MHz) Figure 3-1: Channel Plans, Dual-Band (45 Mbps) 5725 5750 5800 5g25 Frequency (MHz) Figure 3-2: Channel Pian, Single-Band (45 Mbps)
| 5300 Frequency (MHz) Figure 3-3: Channel Plan, Single-Band (100 Mbps) PAGE 3-10 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WESTERN JULY 2000 Multiplex 3.6 Mounting the Tsunami The Tsunami radio can be mounted at any height in a standard 19-inch rack. Blank rack-mounting spaces above and below the Tsunami are recommended, especially if the surrounding equipment dissipates a considerable amount of heat (over 40W). The Tsunami radio may be set up for mounting with the front edge projecting from the tront face of a standard 19-inch rack using the rack mounting brackets enclosed with the screws in the Accessory Kit (4 per bracket). The rack mounting brackets may be reversed, in order to install for flush or cabinet mounting if preferred. Depending on rack configuration, it may be necessary to remove the four adhesive backed rubber feet on the bottom of the unit. The Tsunami radio has internal fans which intake and
@ exhaust on the left and right sides of the chassis. When rack mounting, it is important to leave a smail gap between the outer edges of the radio and the inside edge of the rack. The Tsunami radio may alternatively be placed on a table or shelf attached to a wall. Because of the iow weight of the Tsunami, any mounting option other than rack mounting will be less secure. en SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-11 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL M JULY 2000 uitiplerx 3.7. Power Connection and Wiring There is no ON/OFF switch on the Tsunami. As soon as power is applied, the equipment will be operational. This means that there can be up to 1W of AF power present at the antenna port. The antenna port should be terminated before power is applied. Power is connected using the DC power plug contained in the Accessory Kit. Use Table 3-A or 3-
B along with the associated diagram of Figure 3-3 or 3-4 to connect the DC power cables. For example, for a negative DC power input, use Table 3-A and Figure 3-3. NEGATIVE DC POWER INPUT
(-20 TO -63 VDC) PIN | FUNCTION 1 Power (-DC) |
2 _| Ground (see figure 3-7) _ _|
3 Return (+DC) i 4 Return (+DC) 5 Ground (see figure 3-7) 6 Power (-DC) Table 3-A: DC Power Connection for Negative Supply POSITIVE DC POWER INPUT
(+20 TO +63 VDC}
PIN FUNCTION 1 | Return (-DC) 2 Ground (see figure 3-8) _ 3 Power (+DC) |
4 Power (+DC) 5 Ground (see figure 3-8) |
6
| Return (-DC) Table 3-B: DC Power Connection for Positive Supply Pins 7 and 6 are connected together on the motherboard. Either ee pin may be used to apply (-DC) DC power input. Similarly, pins 3 and 4 are connected together on the motherboard and may be used to apply (+DC) DC power input. For DC power return connection, connect to the opposite voltage (either the -DC or the +DC Pin} and connect the return to ground at the DC power plug on pins 2 and/or 5. ees ee PAGE 3-12 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS. INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS RIDGES WE 5 TERN JULY 2000 Multiplex 3.7.1 DC Power Wiring Connect the power cable with adequate current rating (minimum of 20 AWG) to the terminals shown on the removed (not plugged into the radio) DC power plug using the screw connections. The recommended minimum current rating of external fuses and cables is 3 Amps. The Tsunami radios consume less than 1 Amp at +48V and less than 2 Amps at +24V. Be sure the DC power cable is less than 3 meters (9.75 feet) in length. Each Tsunami terminal should be externally fused separately with a 5 Amp. maximum fuse. The DC power cable must be less than three (3) meters in fength. if using negative power, connect the negative voltage to pins 1 or 6. Connect the ground return connection to pins 3 or 4. See Figure 3-3. if using positive power, connect the positive voltage to pins 3 or 4. Connect the ground return connection to pins 1 or 6. See Figure 3-4. The ground connection is available at pins 2 and 5. Either pin may be used to ground the return side of the power supply. Do not ground both sides of the power supply. Proper grounding, efther through the chassis and/or the power
@ supply, can be very important for protection from lightning. A grounding screw hole is provided on the rear panel. Sy The ground connection may be left floating if the power supply Ay: is referenced to ground externally and fo avoid ground loops in
* some configurations. However, this may not provide adequate grounding for lightning protection. Use a DVM (digital voitmeter) to verify voltage and polarity on the DC power plug. Do not connect the DC power piug to the rear of the Tsunami terminal until a load is connected to the antenna port (either an RF pad, or an RF cable and antenna). o-oo rn SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-13 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 Figure 3-3: Negative Voliage DC Connection i Ground +DC Ground Return Return Figure 3-5: Positive Voltage DC Connection Make sure that when connecting the mating plug that it is
@ properly orienied (terminal screws pointing up) and securely fastened. TTT PAGE 3-14 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (
Multiplex 3.7.2 AC Power Connection The optional AC power supply operates from any AC voltage 100V - 250V and 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The AC supply is equipped with a mating connector that piugs directly into the Tsunami radio and an AC cord with a 3-pin AC piug. The AC cord color code is shown in Figure 3-5 in case users wish to replace the AC plug supplied with a different type of piug. S FEET room NEHA fattached) Elc 31048 PLUG Renaeswomeerean POWER SUPPLY i AC Gor 3 SFEET =
o WALL PLUG Figure 3-6: AC Connection TT SSeS SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-15
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 3.8 Antenna Connection The Tsunami radio is equipped with an N-type female connector at the antenna port located on the rear panel. A short length (~6 feet) jumper cable such as RG-214 coax {or pigtail) fitted with two N-type mate connectors can be used to connect the antenna Port to the antenna transmission line (see Section 3.9), The recommended cabie type for a jumper is RG-214. A low loss 50-ohm cable (for example LDF4-50 1/2 inch coax) or EW-52 waveguide is recommended for the antenna transmission line between the top of the rack and the antenna. The return loss presented by the transmission line at the top of the rack should be as high as possible
(20 dB, minimum recommended). The length of the antenna transmission line should be kept as short as possible (to minimize losses). To minimize feeder losses, the use of elliptical waveguide is recommended (typical loss is 1.25 dB/100 ft) for feeder lengths in excess of 200 feet. Depending on path length and feeder length, 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch coax cable can be used. For the Tsunami radio, 1/2 or 5/8 coaxial cable (LDF4-50 or Coe LDF4.5-50) is recommended. Coaxial cable 7/8" or farger can Se exhibit moding at 5.8 GHz and is not recommended for 5.8 GHz radios. For waveguide transmission line at 5.8 GHz, EW-52 waveguide is recommended. EW-63 will also work, but may exhibit more Joss. Do not use right angle N-type connectors with the 5.8 GHz wy Tsunami radios: they may present high toss at 5.8 GHz. Do not use 4 low quality N-type jumper cable with the Tsunami. Some cable types, such as RG-8, may have high loss at 5.8 GHz. eo YO eee PAGE 3-16 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WESTERN JULY 2000 Multiplex 3.9 Transmission Line Connection The transmission line feeder (such as LDF4-50 1/2 inch coax cable or EW-52 elliptical waveguide} should be prepared first by cutting to the approximate tength (allowing some excess) and installing the appropriate connector on the antenna end. The prepared transmission line is then pulled through the cable ducts, trays or conduit (as required) to the antenna, while being careful not to kink or damage the transmission line in any way. The transmission line should be supported in a tray on horizontal runs and by hangers on vertical runs. Hangers should be spaced according to the manufacturer's instructions (typically every 5 feet under conditions of no ice and not greater than 85 mph winds}. The transmission line should be grounded using the manufactures recommended grounding kit. Grounding kits attach to the outer copper conductor. Grounds must be installed at the antenna, at the bottom of the tower (if applicable} and where the transmission line enters the building. Long transmission line runs should be grounded every 100 feet. in areas of high incidence of lightning, dissipaters should be attached to antennas. In addition, coaxial, in-line, spark-gap type, lightning Suppressors should be added at the bottom of the coax cable before entering the building/enclosure. Any in-line lightning protection device must be rated for the
@ operating frequency of the Tsunami (5.3/5.8 GHz}. After installation, the transmission line is terminated with an N-type male connector/adapter attached at the equipment end. For waveguide, this typically requires a CPR-to-N adapter. Prior to operation, the electrical integrity of the transmission line, including all connectors, can be checked with a simple DC check between the center conductor and outer conductor. (This is neither possible, nor required for waveguide). The transmission line shouid ideally be connected directly to the antenna at one end and to the Tsunami antenna port at the other end. However, short RG-214 type pigtail jumper cables may be required to avoid sharp bends in the transmission line to limit steess on either connection. 7/8 inch coax cable or larger is not recommended for use at 5.3 GHiz and higher frequencies. wy Do not use right angle N-type connectors with the 5.3 or 5.8
- OF; GHz Tsunami radios: they may present high loss at 5.3 or 5.8
# GHz. Do not use a low quality N-type jumper cable with the Tsunami. Some cable types, such as AG-8, may have too high 4 loss at 5.3 and 5.8 GHz. _Ree SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS: PAGE 3-17 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Tsunami FAMILY We 5 TERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 3.10 Antenna Installation & Alignment INSTALLER CAUTION: Antennas used for this device must be fix-mounted on permanent outdoor structures to provide 5 meter or more separation from all persons during device operation to comply with FCC and other regulatory RF Exposure requirements. installers should contact the manufacturer for applicable antenna gain and type restrictions to ensure compliance. The antenna installation consists of permanently mounting the antenna outdoors on a tower, building roof, or other location that provides line-of-sight path clearance to the far-end location. In general, antennas smalier than 2 feet diameter are not recommended for urban areas due to their wider beamwidths, which results in higher interference susceptibility. Antennas should be ordered with a suitable mounting kit specific to the site requirements. For exampie, specifying round or angle tower leg adapters, or a roof tripod as necessary. The antenna must be very rigidly mounted, with adequate room for azimuth and elevation adjustment from the rear. The antenna polarization must be the same at both ends of the link, either vertical or horizontal. in general, antenna mountings require a support pipe to which upper and lower support brackets are attached with U bolts. The antenna and optional elevation and azimuth adjustment rods are then mounted onto the support brackets. The whole structure must be adequately grounded for lightning protection. The antenna system must always be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, Unless special test equipment is available, two operating Tsunami terminals are required to align the antennas. Altematively, a CW generator may be used to transmit a signal toward the end under alignment. The antenna is coarse aligned using visual sighting and then fine aligned using the receive signal level (RSL) voltage of the Tsunami. The RSL voltage reading can still be used to peak antennas even if the radios have not synchronized, however far-end RSL cannot be measured from the near-end terminal until radios are synchronized. To coarse align the antenna, first set it for flat elevation (no up or down tilt) using a spirit level. Then point it at a heading marker obtained using a compass back-bearing fron an adjacent location, (ideally, 100 feet or more away from the antenna). lf a heading marker cannot be set sufficiently far away (for example when ona city building roof or looking through a window) then a rough azimuth setting can be obtained by sighting along the antenna feed. rr PAGE 3-18 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL ~
Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WE 5 TERN Multiplex JULY 2000
. If should be verified that both antennas are on the same Ap: polarization by using the manufacturer's instructions. Otherwise 2s fhe RSL will be approximately 25 to 30 dB below the calculated level. Most antennas will also need fine alignment obtained using an operating link because it is very important to maximize the receive RF signal levei at each end of the radio link.
@ Read Section 3.7 before applying DC power to the Tsunami radio. Once the coarse alignment has been set-up at both ends, then the link can be powered and some ievel of reliable communication established. The voltage at the Tsunami front panel RSL test point should be measured with a DVM to determine the relative receive RAF signal level. For the fine alignment, adjusting first the azimuth and then the elevation of the loca! antenna will maximize the RSL voltage. Then, the far antenna is aligned in the same way, using the RSL voltage of its local Tsunami radio. When aligning antennas it may be convenient to run two wires from the ASL and ground test points to the antenna so that the voltmeter reading is directly visible to the technicians aligning the antenna. Also, a cellular telephone or two-way radio may be useful for coordinating alignment activities between both ends of the link. Once the radios are coarse aligned and synchronized, the built-in orderwire phone service can also be used to coordinate alignment between both ends of the link. An orderwire telephone will provide end-to-end voice whe communications once radios are synchronized. Synchronization Y usually can be accomplished by coarse alignment only. After
: synchronization, the orderwire phones can be used to communicate between radio sites for antenna fine alignment. The phone interconnect cable can be extended to the antenna when desired. The larger the antenna size, the more critical alignment becomes: for example, with a 2 foot dish, the antenna can be moved #3 degrees off the correct heading before the receive signal level drops by 3 dB. This compares with a 6-foot dish which may only be moved +1 degree for the same degradation. The graph shown in Figure 3-6 shows the typical variation of RSL voltage as the receive signal level is increased from threshold to a higher level. There is some variation between Tsunami receivers, but an approximate estimate of the potential RSL value may be made using this figure. cS Use the Factory Test Daia Sheet shipped with your Tsunami terminal to
=< obtain fhe best estimaie of your RSL. Above 0 dBm RSL, the receiver may produce errors: however this level is rarely likely to be exceeded. A link budget calculation should be made to calculate the anticipated RSL as described in Section 3.3.3. During anomalous propagation conditions, the RSL may fade but will net increase up more than 10 dB (except in unusual very long paths which may fade up by 15 dB). SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS, PAGE 3-19 G WESTERN Multiplex q Antenna alignment should enable the RSL to be peaked to the level calculated in the link budget. if the RSL is peaked but is approximately 20 dB below the calculated level, then it is likely that the antennas are aligned on a sidelobe of-the aniennas radiated signal. In this case, the antennas should be rotated ina wide arc until the main lobe is iocated. {Other possible causes of tow RSL are path obstructions, joss in connectors, adapters and pigtail jumper cables or different antenna polarization at each end of the link.) Tsunami 100BaseT Dual & Single Models mere pensiinreerrniy ie INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BAIDGES JULY 2000 eee 75 70 65 80 85 50 45 ABL {dB) 40 Figure 3-7: Typical RSL Voltage versus Received Signal Level (RSL) Volts 0.20 0.40 0.00 eee SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-20 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN Multiplex 3.11 Ethernet Interface Connection The radio links 100BaseT interface connection to the Tsunami radio is on the front panel. for the connections if the radio is installed in an area prone to
@ Additional external lightning protection devices are recommended lightning. The 100BaseT connection to the Tsunarni is at the data interface on the front of the shelf. Either wire or fiber connections can be used. SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-21 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 3.12 System Turn-up to Service 1. Prior to installing the system, it may be desirable to perform a back-to-back test of the Tsunami radio pair. Consult Section 4.9 for further details. Back-to-back testing is a simple way to verify that the Tsunami radios are fully operational before they are installed. installation adds several variables (such as antenna alignment) which can lead to system turn-up delays. Also, during back-to-back testing, the DIP switch settings and some connections can be iested. This step can eliminate a majority of troubleshooting once the radios are instaled. A cellular phone or two-way radio system (watkie talkie, CB, mobile radio) can be very usetul during installation. These ae can be used for temporary near-end and far-end Ay communications between ithe installation personne! at one Site and installation personne! at the other site while installing the system. These can also be helpful for communication between a person at the top of a very tail tower and ground personnel. The Tsunami radio incorporates an internal Orderwire feature that provides end-to-end telephone style communications. However, the link must be partially operational to use this feature. In lieu of, or in addition to the use of cellular phones or two-way radio, this Orderwire feature can also be very useful for installation, but typically cannot be put into service until step 8 or 9 of this procedure is completed. See Section 3.14.1 for more details, 2. Perform a general alignment of the antennas on both ends of the path using binoculars, compass or other related tools. It is important to have the antennas aligned as accurately as possible before putting radio traffic over the link. This will heip in getting the systern running more rapidly. See Section 3.10 for more details. 3. Connect the transmission line to the antenna, and feed it to the Tsunami radio location
(see Section 3.9). Connect the opposite end of the transmission line to the N-type female connectar located on the filter assembly which occupies the top half of the Tsunami rear panel. The connection must be terminated into an antenna or a load before DC power is applied to the radio. 4, Verify that the same channel plan (e.g. A, B) as the near-end radio, and the opposite Tx and Rx frequencies (e.g. A1 and A2 make up a matched pair of radios). 5. With the DC power source active, but not plugged into the Tsunami tadio, using a voltmeter, confirm that the DC mating connector has the proper power connections in accordance with Section 3.7. Verify the polarity and the absolute voltage on all pins. Verify ground connection for power. 6. Connect power to the Tsunami radio. Verify that the Front Panel ON LED indication is illuminated. This confirms that power has been properly applied. __ OOOO PAGE 3-22 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WESTERN Multiplex JULY 2000 Ensure that the AF Antenna port connection is properly terminated before applying power to the Tsunami terminal, as in step 3. When the Tsunami radio is initially powered-on, sore alarm vf conditions may be present. This is normal and alarms can be ignored at this time. 7. Place a voltmeter across the GND and PWR front panel test points. See Figure 3-7 for voitage setting information and Table 3-C for typical output power levels for given cable lengths where EIRP limits apply. If necessary, use a small screwdriver at the front panel receptacle to adjust the output power of the local transmitter in accordance with the path analysis calculations. The recessed potentiometer is rotated clockwise to increase transmit output power and counter clockwise to decrease transmit output power. After verifying correct setting of the transmit output power, disconnect the voltmeter. Place the cover cap found in the installation accessory kit over the front panel receptacie. The Tsunami radio requires professional installation. With some Tsunami models, in certain countries, there may be Effective
@ Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) limits which dictate the maximurn output power that the Tsunami radio can transmit given the transmission line loss and the gain of the antenna. Consult with appropriate government agencies or Western Multiplex if there is any question regarding maximum output power allowed. Do net adjust output power above factory settings. ee a UES SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-23 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. w Tsunami FAMILY ESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 Tsunami 100BaseT Dual & Single Models 5 y tf an 4 oT {
35 j 3 ! A 5 25 SS 4 = Volts g Re 5 eee : 5 18
' a = i os ! ;
ot +
25 20 15 16 5 0 Tx Power (d5}
Figure 3-8: Typical RF Output Power versus PWR Voltage omen Use the Tsunami Factory Test Data sheet that came with Ie your tadio(s) to determine more precisely the voltage corresponding to the AF output power. een PAGE 3-24 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (
Multiplex
: For precision measurement of transmit output power, it is best oe to connect an RF power meter to the antenna port. The PWR
# port voliage may not provide enough precision. This is especially important where EIRP limits apply to the installation. sping! in eases of no EIRP limits, the radio transmitter ouiput power oy: should be left at the factory setting, except for very short paths using very high gain antennas, where excessive power may not be advised. Don forget that fhe RF output port should be terminated at ail times when power is applied to the Tsunami radio. Therefore, disconnect power to the radio before connecting a power meter and reapply power once connected. Often, an AF power meter may have a limit to the input power that it can measure without damage. It is advised to place a calibrated fixed value RF attenuator (typicaily 20 dB or more) between the Tsunami radio and ihe power meter to assure proper operation and safety for the RFE power meter. The vaiue of this fixed attenuation can then be added fo the vaiue of the RF power meter reading fo obtain the actual Tsunami radio transmitter cutpul power. 8, Connect a voltmeter across the GND and RSL front panel test points. This voltage reading corresponds to the Received Signal Level (RSL) of the near-end radio. In other words, RSL is the amount of signa! the near-end radio is receiving from the far-
end radie. Since the antennas have not been finely aligned, it is not expected at this time that the RSL will read very high. However, at this point it can be verified that some communication is taking place between the two Tsunami terminais. Use the RSL voltage reading to align the antennas. Align one antenna at a time in accordance with Section 3.10. Complete alignment of both ends of the radio link before going further. The RSL voliage output on the radio's front panel will output a i voltage over the usable range of the radio. Refer to Figure 3-6 in Section 3-20. The Tsunami radio has a unique feature of allowing measurement of the far-end ASL from the near-end radio. This is only possible if the Tsunami radias are communicating
(the RSL is above threshold). The far-end RSL can be used to verify that adjustments to local antenna alignment are corresponding to the far-end radio reception. Far-end RSL is measured by pressing and holding the DISPLAY FAR END front panel button. While this button is held, the RSL voltage indicates the RSL of the far-end radio. RSL of both ends should be verified to be within approximately 2 dB of predicted value (see Section 3.3.3). There are several factors that can contribute to low RSL:
- Incorrect antenna alignment (aligned on a tobe and not on the main signal)
- Improper polarization alignment of antennas (horizontal vs. vertical)
- Transmission fine problems (loose connections, bent or damaged cables, lossy adapters)
- Path obstructions (trees, buildings, hills, etc.)
- Path clearance (line-of-sight, earth curvature, Fresnel zone, diffraction and partial obstruction}
i A SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-25 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000
- Weather (inversion layers, ducting and multipath)
- Antenna feed (coaxial/cannector} problem The Tsunami radio requires professional installation. Don't Ee! forget that the transmitter output power adjustment on the ad Tsunami radio effects the RSL. Depending on EIRP limits (if any), path distance, and antenna gain, you may need to adjust the oufput transmit power to the proper jeveil before putting the radios in service. ff radio synchronization has been established, the radio link cae may be able to provide some limited communications over the
: fink. it can be helpful to establish voice communications from
* one end of the radio link to the other using the Orderwire feature of the Tsunami radio. See Section 3.14.1 for details. lf RSL is lower than anticipated, recheck the path clearance and transmission line as these are the typical causes of low ASL. Radio operations can be verified by connecting radios back-to-back with attenuators (40-60 dB), (see Section 4.9). If the problem remains, consult Section 4 of this manual for troubleshooting techniques which will help determine the source of the problem. 9. Once radio performance is verified and acceptable, the Tsunami radios can now be put into service with the intended Fast Ethernet traffic. Connect to the LAN or computer using the RJ45 (wire) or ST (fiber) 100BaseT connector. With Fast Ethernet traffic applied in both directions, all front pane! LEDs, except for POWER and the data TXD/RXD fights should be off. If any other LEDs are on, consult the trouble shooting sections of this manual. 10. Now that the link is operational, other services can be connected including T1 (DSX-1), Orderwire, Diagnostics, Alarms and Aux Data (Service Channel). Consult Section 3.44 for details on these connections. PAGE 3-26 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (
JULY 2000 -
FCC EIRP limitations:
The dual band model 27700-4X should not exceed a total of +30 dB E.1.R.P. The single band model 27710-4X should not exceed a total of +53 dB E.LR.P. Table 3-C: Transmitter Oufput Power Adjustment
(0 dBW (5.3 GHz) and +23 dBW (5.8 GHz) EIRP Installations) ve SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-27 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS SRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 3.13 Output Power Adjustment The Tsunami radio requires professional installation. In certain cases, it is necessary to adjust the output power lower (never higher) from the factory setting, for example:
to meet EIRP (effective isotropic radiated power) Itmits.
* to avoid exceeding the maximum far-end RSL of -30 dBm.
+ to coordinate a hub or repeater location. To ensure maximum protection of the radio circuits, always
@ ensure the antenna connector is terminated when power is applied. Never adjust output power above factory settings. For precise measurement of transmitter power, a calibrated RF power meter (such as the HP 435B with Power Sensor HP8481) is recommended. This power sensor can be connected cirectly to the output of the radio without exceeding the power rating. With some power meters, it may be necessary to place a calibrated in-line fixed attenuator between the radio antenna port and the power meter so as to not exceed the power meter's maximum input level. Thruline power meters do not operate at Tsunam/ RF frequencies. ff adjusting the output power to meet an EIRP limit, it will be first necessary to calculate the overall system gains and iosses, including feeder losses for the type of transmission line installed and the antenna gain. Also refer to Table 3-C for transmitter output power settings where installed with various transmission line lengths and antenna sizes. You may determine the radio transmit power for EIRP limited installations by the following equation:
Tx Power (dBm) = EIRP Limit(dBm) + Feeder Loss(dB) - Antenna Gain(dB) Tes For the US and Canada, a +30 dBm EIRP limit applies for the dual band (5.3/5.8 GHz) Tsunami radios and a +53 dBm EIRP limit applies for the single band (5.8 GHz) Tsunami radios. Output power may be adjusted using a small screwdriver and rotating the potentiometer which is recessed behind the front panel. Ciockwise rotation increases output power while counter-
clockwise rotation decreases output power. In figu of a caliorated RF power meter, the PWR test port voltage can be used to estimate the output power. Figure 3-7 illustrates the voltage reading for various output power levels. The factory test data sheet should be used to establish a more precise setting of this adjustment. After setting the correct output power, place the cover cap found in ihe installation accessory kit over the front panel receptacie. TS PAGE 3-28 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES we TERN JULY 2000 Multiplex 3.14 Additional Connections There are additional customer connections which are optional and are not required to make the Tsunami operational but may prove useful. 3.14.1 Orderwire Connection Orderwire is a telephone type wayside service which allows users of the Tsunami radio to establish voice communications from one radio to another, either directly to the companion far-
end, or through a repeater configuration, or several repeater configurations. Telephone connection specifications:
REN (Ringer Equivalency Number) 1.0B DTMF tones within +1.5% of nominal freq. Ringing Voltage 48 VDC, typical
(Ringing voltage is adequate for modern solid state ringers, NOT for the older mechanica! type ringers) This Orderwire service does not affect the normal radio transmission of traffic. Refer to Section 2.3.5 for the telephone specifications. For simple near-end to far-end communications, follow the steps below:
1. Using a standard RJ-11 telephone cable, connect a standard electronic telephone (a touch tone phone, complete with dialer; a handset by itself will not work} to the Orderwire connector on the Tsunami front panel. This connector is wired identically to a standard two-wire telephone jack, see Figure 3-18 for details. 2. With a telephone connected to each Tsunami terminal on opposite ends of the link, either telephone can be used to dial-up the far-end location. The far-end terminal's internal ringer and the connected telephone will ring, anc if answered, two-way full-duplex voice cammunication is established. Tsunami radios connected must have unique address settings
@ if using the Orderwire or Network management functions, all
{telephone numbers). 4. Ifthe Tsunami radios are connected in a repeater configuration, Orderwire services can be established to ail Tsunami terminals in the network by implementing a connection of their rear-panel connectors between repeater terminais. At the repeater site, a cable can be connected to the two Tsunami terminals between their rear panei VF 9-pin connectors as shown in Figure 3-8. With this cable in piace, the Orderwire function will operate at terminals at each end of the repeater and ai the repeater site. This function can be continued through several repeater sites if desired. For hub connections of 3 or more Tsunami radios at the same site, an external 4-wire bridge is required to connect all radios to the orderwire. The orderwire system can be integrated with orderwire Ez equipment supported by many other vendors. if your existing a ordenvire network uses 2 digit addressing, and 0 dBm VF interface, it can be connected to a Tsunami as shown in Figure 3-8. gg OO SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-29
. Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 Dialing a * (star key) on the orderwire telephone implements an ail call
. feature which rings all connected radios. Also, if a phone anywhere in the
~ 0 connected network has accidentally been jeft off-hook, the # (pound key) key can be used io mute all off-hook handsets until they are placed on and off hook again. The orderwire operates like a party line. All telephones provide ny communication to all other telephones in the connecied network. Even if VY . a particular telephone does not ring, it car still be used to falk and listen
* to any ongoing orderwire activity if the orderwire is in use at other terminal locations. TSUNA TELEPHONE Lesa) resi
77
Grou ney VF Port Connection Figure 3-9: Orderwire & VF Port Connection PAGE 3-30 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES We $s TERN Multiplex JULY 2000 3.14.2 Alarm Connections External alarm outputs are provided at the 9-pin, D-type subminiature ALARM connector. There are two Form C summary alarm relays capable of switching 30 VDC at 1 A. See Table 3-E and Figure 3-9 for Alarm Connections. The summary alarm (Form C relay} is activated by any near-end front panel LED alarm condition, including if the internal test mode is enabled. The out-of-service summary alarm (Form C relay) is activated by any of the following alarm conditions:
+ FF LINK
* Radio Fail
* Internal Test Le
| Out of Service NCL summary Alarm F NO Relay (Form C}
RSL MON n Ground YT TX MON :
No _Summary Alarm
: Ralay (Form C) nc J Figure 3-10: Pin Connections, ALARM Interface vO Ett SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-31 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Fsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Muliiplex JULY 2000 PIN 1 PIN 2
| PIN 7 | RSL output DC voltage referenced to pin 3 PIN 8 Tx Power output DC voitage referenced to pin 3 l
; PING NO, SUMMARY ALARM, FORM C - normally | PIN 4 NO, OUT OF SERVICE SUMMARY ALARM, |
open connection on summary alarm relay. FORM C - normally open connection on out-ot-
Closed when in alarm. service summary alarm relay. Closed when in |
' alarm. i i I
-'C, SUMMARY ALARM, FORM C - common | PING | C, QUT OF SERVICE SUMMARY ALARM,
, connection on the summary alarm relay. FORM C - commen connection for the out-of-
| service summary alarm relay. NC, SUMMARY ALARM, FORM C - normally | PIN 5 NC, OUT OF SERVICE SUMMARY ALARM, |
closed connection on summary alarm relay. FORM C - normally closed connection on out-of-
service summary alarm relay. Open when in alarm. fable 3-D: Alarm interface Connections All alarms are active for a minimum of one second, or as long as the alarm condition persists, which ever is longer. a PAGE 3-32 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (
Multiplex 3.14.3. Configuration Port Operation The Contig Port is used to retrieve diagnostic information and to configure additional features within the Tsunami radios by means of a computer connection via SERIAL interface. Also can be used as an RS-232 port to download the latest revision radio operation software. The contig port allows connection of RS-232 devices to receive status of the Tsunami radio and provide configuration. For RS-232 diagnostics connection (Section 4.11) to the Tsunami radio, connect the serial device
(modem, computer, terminal) to the male 9-pin subminiature connector in accordance with Figure 3-10. RS-232 Output Ground +
RS-232 Input 4 |2 (33 4 [5 6 |7 |8 |9
Must Not Be Connected
(as viewed from rear panel) Figure 3-11: RS-232 Contig Port Connections
@ Pins 6 through 9 must not be connected for RS-232 communications to operate properly. a SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-33 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 3.14.4 AUX DATA (Digital Service Channel) Connection The AUX DATA port is a separate wayside serial port which can be configured to allow the connection of any user seria! data (to 9600 baud) through the radio network. Connection to the AUX DATA port is an RS-232 serial interface, identical to the config port {see Section 3.14.3). This port does not affect the Ethernet traffic on the Tsunami radio. er PAGE 3-34 . SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . w FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES E 5 TERN Multiplex JULY 2000 3.14.5 Tl (DSX-1) Interface Connection The Tsunami tadio also provides a wayside T1 connection. This connection aliows for standard DSX-1 connect of voice circuits without affecting the Ethernet traffic. A standard RJ-48c connector is provided for this connection. 3.14.6 CEPT-1 (E1) InterfaceConnection The CEPT-1 interface connection provides a balanced (120 ohm) wayside E1 connection. If an unbalanced 75 ohm connection (RJ45) is required, an optional baiun will provide this interface. If you can not locate these baluns (balanced/unbalanced) devices, please consult the factory. for all user connections if the radio is installed in an area prone to
@ Additional extemaf lightning protection devices are recommended lightning. 3.14.7. NMS Interface Connection The NMS connection provides connection for the network management system. This allows an HTML interface to the Tsunami radio for purposes of monitoring, contiguration and security settings. This connection is an RU-45 style connection and complies to standard 10BaseT interface. Typically, the installer or manager will connect to the NMS with a stand-alone computer to initially configure the radio prior to installation. If IP addresses and security are set properly, the connection can also be used as an out-of-band connection for radio management. Alternatively, if the 10BaseT is connected to a network, or combined with the 100BaseT traffic on the link, via an extemal 10/100 switch, hub or router, full wireless NMS can be achieved for all radios in the network. The factory default IP address is set to 10.0.0.1. To reset the radio back to the factory default, Hold down the far-end test button while powering up the radio. Release the switch after 6 seconds. More details on the NMS connection can be found in Section 4 of this manual, In the future, this connection will also allow NMS via SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) in addition to the HTML interface that is presently supplied. Consult factory for details or assistance with NMS connections, if required. aN SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS PAGE 3-35 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunam! FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2006 Your Notes on the Tsunami Radio er PAGE 3-36 SECTION 3: INSTALLATION & ADJUSTMENTS Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
( Multiplex 4, Troubleshooting 4.1 Regular Maintenance The Tsunami radios do not require any regular maintenance, however, if is prudent to monitor the radio link at regular intervals to assure that the link conditions are not changing. When visiting a radio site for maintenance, the following items may be checked and their results recorded:
* RSL Voltage
~ PWR Voltage Far-end RSL Voltage Alarm conditions
+ Verify radio has adequate ventilation
+ Verity security ID is set the same at each radio through NMS if any alarm conditions exist, they should be recorded, and troubleshooting procedures from this Section of the manual should be followed. ee SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-1
1 2 | Part 2 | Users Manual | 1.89 MiB |
Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 4.2 Changing Frequency Plans The Tsunami RF frequency selections are listed in Section 3.5. The near-end radio and the far-
end radio must be corresponding (e.g. A1 / A2). The frequency of a given Tsunami terminal is set by the specific filter, the physical orientation of this assembly, and a setting within the CONFIG port (or NMS configuration instructions, Section 4.11). With respect to a given filter, the frequencies are fixed, because tuned RF filters are required for normal operation. Changing of the
(pre-tuned) radio frequencies may be required when installing spares or for special situations, such as interference mitigation. This is accomplished by installing an alternate filter. Itis not necessary to remove the cover assembly of the Tsunami 1. Remove any cabies connected to the antenna connector on the dipiexer (filter) and then temove the two screws that mount the filter to the Tsunarni chassis. 2. Slowly remove the filter from the chassis being careful to not endanger the cables that are connected to the rear side of the filter. 3. Disconnect the two SMA connectors that are attached to the rear of the filter with a 5/16 open end wrench. 4. Select the new filter such that the frequency channel label on the filter corresponds to the desired frequency channel (or rotate filter if applicable see note below). 5. Connect the two SMA connectors to the new or reoriented filter with the 5/16 open end wrench. 6. Slowly place the wired filter assembly so that it is flush with the rear panel. 7. Install the two screws that mount the filter to the rear panel. 8. Modify the operating frequency as described in the CONFIG menus {Section 4.11) Single-band versions of this radio can be interchanged irom Al to A2 by changing (bul not rotating) the installed filter. After filier is changed the frequency settings within the configuration menu (NMS) must be changed to match the installed filter. Dual-band versions of this radio also can change channels, but the orientation of low-side or high-side transmit must be retained. That is, an Al radio can only be changed into a B1 radio with a new filter, but not into an A2 or a B2. Likewise, the A2 radio can only be changed into a B2 radio with a new filter, but not into an Af or B1. The diplexer filters can goon any radio and must be properly oriented. After filter is changed, the frequency setting within the configuration menu
(NMS) must be changed to match the installed filter. Or eee PAGE 4-2 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WESTERN JULY 2000 Mulfiplex 4.3 Using a Spare Terminal For dual-band units, a spare of each band may be required. For single-band units, one spare Tsunami terminal will service both channel orientations. See Section 4.2 for changing frequencies of a spare radio. Customers with several radios, or radios in critical operations are encouraged to purchase one or more spare radios of each model in their system. This will allow rapid restoration of radio service in the unlikely event of a radio failure. SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-3 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 4.4 Technical Support Western Multiplex provides 24-hour telephone technical support for installed Tsunami radios. Customers are encouraged to troubleshoot the radio and link in accordance with the latter part of this section in this manual before contacting Western Multiplex. Western Multiplex aiso has a limited supply of Tsunami radios that can be loaned to out-of-service customers for installation while units are being repaired. Loaner supply is limited, and is only used for critical applications on a first-come, first-served basis. Customer service #: +1408 542-5390 eo eee PAGE 4-4 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WE s TERN Multiplex JULY 2000 4.5 Repair Policy The Tsunami terminal includes comprehensive alarm indicators designed to diagnose potential faults. Should a fault occur, it often may be resolved by operator adjustment. Should a fault occur that cannot be resolved by operator adjustment and has been confirmed by looping terminals together on the bench (See Section 4.9), then the equipment should be returned to the factory tor repair. The Tsunami radio is a complex system not designed for user repair. Do not remove the cover or open any part of the Tsunami terminal. The complete Tsunami terminal shauld be sent back in its original packing material for factory repair. Please contact the factory in advance of returning the product. You will be assigned a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number that authorizes your return. Units sent to the factory without an RMA number may be delayed in the processing of the repair. Be sure to include the following information:
RMA number description of the probiem your name and telephone number
* return shipping address
*% urgency of repair an Please refer to the published Warranty policy for repair policy oe . an details. om Tsunami radios should be packaged in their original packing ie boxes for shipment whenever possible Western Multiplex can provide an empty box shipment to facilitate proper packaging. Regardless, proper and adequate packaging musi be used for shipments io protect the radio(s} from damage. Western Multiplex can not be held responsible for any repairs due to inadequately packed materials. Damage caused by improper packing will likely result in higher repair costs and delays (refer to the Warranty section at the beginning of this manual). rr rn SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-5 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 4.6 Front Pane! Status LEDs There are several front panel status LEDs on the Tsunami radio. These LEDs indicate conditions where either a hardware failure has occurred or the radio link is not optimum. in many cases, a combination of LEDs may be illuminated, The following sections describe the necessary troubleshooting procedures should any LEDs) indicate a problem during or after installation. Green = Radio hardware O.K. Radio Fail Red = Hardware failure detected Green = Error-free operation Yellow = Bit errors occurring Red = Excessive bit errors or radio link faiiure Flashing = Link ID mismatched RF Link Green = 400BaseT data transmit present Yellow = 100BaseT port connected (no data present) Off = No 100BaseT connection detected
| Green = 100BaseT data receive present Yellow = 100BaseT port connected (no data present) Off = No 100BaseT connection detected COLL Yellow = Collisions occurring on 100BaseT (half-duplex mode) FAR END Red = Alarm(s) present on the far-end radio**
Green = Tx or Rx data present on the NMS interface Yellow = NMS interface connected (no data present)
| Off = No NMS interface connection detected RXD NMS ({0BaseT) Green = Alarm enabled and T1 connection detected Red = Alarm enabied and no T1 connection detected Yellow = Alarm disabled and T1 connection detected j Off = Alarm disabled and no T1 connection detected T1 INPUT
** Radio Fail, RF Link yellow or red), T1 Input (yellow or red}
___-______-_- ns ee PAGE 4-6 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
( Multiplex 4.6.1 RF LINK Alarm Function:
This LED indicates that the demodulator function is not synchronizing with the intended received signal. Possible Causes:
* Severe path fading due to atmospheric conditions, usually accompanied by low RSL voltage reading Poor transmission line connections usually accompanied by low RSL voltage reading Antenna problems, misalignment, or path clearance usually accompanied by low RSL voltage reading
* improper radio settings (e.g. frequency channel}
* Received signal level (RSL) is too strong
fe Interference 2
Far-End radio transmitter circuitry is faulty ed Near-End radio receiver circuitry is faulty
* Link security ID not the same for each radio Recommended Actions:
Check the following at each end of the link:
* Verify that rear panel fiiters are opposite channel plans on each end (e.g. one is A1 and other is A2). Verify that radio frequency settings match each instailed filter (in NMS menus).
* Verify that ail connections between radios and antennas are secure and all devices between radios and antennas are rated for the radio frequency band (5.3/5.8 GHz). Measure RSL by placing a voltmeter across RSL and GND test points. Compare this voltage to the Factory Test Data Sheet and estimate the RSL in dBm. Compare this to the RSL that was expected using path calculations (see Section 3.3.3}. Press and hold the DISPLAY FAR END button and measure the far-end RSL (while continuing to hold the button). Compare this RSL to the Factory Test Data Sheet for the far-end radio and estimate the RSL in dBm. Again, compare this RSL to the expected RSL from the link budget calculations. lf RSL from both ends of the radio are approximately the same as each other, but lower than anticipated for this installation, then the likely cause of the BER alarm(s} is excessive losses between the radios. Excessive loss problems could include the transmission line at either end, all adapters, connectors, the antennas, the antenna alignment as well as the path itself (any obstructions or clearance problems). Antenna alignment, line-of-sight and path clearance shouid be verified; if this does not improve ASL, all devices between the radios and their antennas at both ends should be checked. Make sure ail transmission fine, connectors and any other devices eee SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-7 Tsunami FAMILY WES TE RN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
; INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 are properly rated for operation at the radio's frequency (5.3/5.8 GHz). If only one end has low RSL, this could be caused by low transmit output power from the opposite end radio. Verify that the transmitter output power of the radio opposite to the low RSL receiver has been set in accordance to path calculations, or EIRP restrictions (where applicable). Power adjustment must be performed by professional installation personne! only. The PWR test point can be used and compared with the Factory Test Data Sheet, the front panel recessed patentiometer can be turned clockwise to increase power. If an RF power meter is available, this can be connected to the RF output of the radio for precision measurement. This test will also verify that the radio transmitter is working properly. If one terminal (or both) has high RSL, this could be caused by a very short path or interference, To verify the possible presence of interference, remove DC power to the radio which is opposite to the one that is reading high RSL. Once power is removed, measure RSL on the remaining radio. If RSL voltage is lower than that which is listed for "Threshold" in the Factory Test Data Sheet, then an interfering signal is present. If interference is suspected, the easiest potential remedy is to swap frequency channels on both sides of the link. See Section 4.2 for details. Swap terminals at both ends of the link so that they are the opposite from their original installation. After both ends are moved, reconnect the radios and determine if the BER alarm is still active. If the BER alarm is Still active, other frequency channels can be installed, or other interference countermeasures can be tried, in accordance with Section 4.8. If all path retated and data input problems have been pursued and the BER alarm is still active, the probiem could be related to a radio failure. While radio failure is typically indicated by more severe alarm conditions, it is possible that one of the radios may be out of specification, and this Could be the cause of the BER alarm. A back-to-back test will verify proper radio operation. See Section 4.9 for details. A threshold test on both radios along with a test to verify proper RF output power would be beneficial. Perform a back-to-back test before returning any radio terminal to
@ the factory for repair. A back-to-back test verifies radio operation.
(See Section 4.9). If the radios successfully pass their back-to-back testing, the probiem is likely with the path or the connections between the radio and the antenna or interference. Before reinstalling the radios, be Sure to set the output power to the appropriate level for the installation. TT eee PAGE 4-8 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATION ANO MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES We s TERN JULY 2090 Multiplex 4.6.2 RADIO FAIL Alarm Funetion:
The RADIO FAIL alarm indicates a known problem with the radio hardware. Possible Causes:
*% Internal synthesizers are uniocked
* Internal digital circuits have failed Recommended Actions:
1. Remove power from the unit. 2. Check to make sure power supply voltages are within specification. 3. Even if the voltages were within specification, reapply power to the unit. 4. if RADIO FAIL alarm clears, place the radio back into service. 5. If RADIO FAIL alarm does not clear, perfarm a back-to-back test to verify radio operation, as described in Section 4.9. 6. If RADIO FAIL aiarm is still active in a back-to-back test, return the radio to the factory for repair (see Section 4.5). SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-9 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
; INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 4.6.3 FAR END Alarm Function:
This LED indicates that there is an alarm condition present on the far-end radio. When the DISPLAY FAR END button is pressed (and held), the status LEDs indicate the alarm conditions of the far-end radio. Possible Cause:
= One or more alarm condition(s) exist on the tar-end radic Recommended Actions:
1. Press and hold the DISPLAY FAR END button and observe the LED status. 2. Follow instructions for troubleshooting the far-end radio in accordance to the appropriate LEDs which are in alarm, as described in Section 4.6.1 through 4.6.4. o_O PAGE 4-10 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES we 5 TERN JULY 2000 Multiplex 4.7 Errors in the Data Stream When the radio is in service, errors in the data stream may occur. This is usually known to the operator by either faulty data indications of downstream equipment or external bit error rate testing. it is possible that no alarms appear on the front pane! during normal operations, but there are errors present in the data stream. Some errors will not result in no alarm (such as bipolar violations, slow dribbling errors, improperly terminated connections or incorrect settings), but will be exhibited on downstream data processing equipment or during a BER test. In other cases, there may be data errors due to atmospheric conditions (fading), interference or other reasons, but not at a high enough error level to be indicated with the BER alarm LED. in the case of these types of errors, the following information can be helpful to troubleshoot the radio fink. Indications:
* During external BER test, test equipment indicates errors
* Downstream equipment (mux, channel bank, CODEC, router, atc.) indicates errors Possible Causes:
* Path fading due to atmospheric conditions
* Poor transmission fine connections
* Antenna problems, misalignment or path clearance
* Received signal jevel (RSL) is too strong
* Far-End radio transmitter circuitry is faulty
* Near-End radio receiver circuitry is faulty
% ~~ Interference Recommended Actions:
1. Verify 100BaseT wiring. 2. Follow the instructions described in Section 4.6.1 rr SECTION 4; TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-11 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 4.8 Interference Countermeasures The recommended interference countermeasures available to the Tsunami operator are as follows:
1 Short Paths The single most effective countermeasure against interference is to maintain short path" length, This may be achieved by dividing long paths into multiple small paths by cascading hops. Intermediate repeaters may be formed using back-to-back Tsunami terminals and transmit output power reduced, if required. By definition, "short path" is defined as a path where fades are extremely rare and signal levels vary by no more than +3 dB during fades. This distance will vary with the RF frequency. Typically a "short path" is defined as any path length shorter than 5 miles at 5.3/5.8 GHz. 2, Narrow Beam Antennas (high gain}
This is the next most effective countermeasure. Narrow beam antennas ensure that the transmitted power is sent in a single direction and this minimizes the possibility of causing interference inadvertently to other users. Narrow beam antennas also reject off-azimuth signals being received from potential sources of interference and have high gain which boosts desired receive levels and improves the carrier to interference ratio. When selecting narrow beam antennas, it is helpful to know that larger antennas generally outperform smaller antennas. Another important antenna specification is the front-to-back ratio which ensures rejection of unwanted signals from azimuth angles behind the antenna. 3. Frequency Selection This is another very effective countermeasure. The Tsunami radio offers several distinct non-
overlapping frequency channel plans (see Sections 3.5 and 4.2) and the radios RF filter is able to reject interference more than 10 MHz away from the receive frequency. Offset frequencies combined with other countermeasures may enabie several receive channels to operate at a single hub site. Because of the limited spreading ratio used, frequency selection is more efficient than code selection for interference rejection when operating multiple Tsunami terminals at a single Site. Interference can often be overcome by exchanging frequencies of both-ends of the radio link
(e.g. change your A1 terminal to an A2 and change the other end from an A2 to an A1}. Also, changing channel pians (e.g. from A to B) can be very effective. (See Section 4.2). rrr oO PAGE 4-12 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WE 5 TERN JULY 2000 Multiplex 4. Antenna Polarization Cross-polarized antennas can provide approximately 20 to 30 dB discrimination of unwanted signals. The actual discrimination will depend upon the antenna design and any rotation of polarization along the path, for example, due to reflections. Discrimination only exists between two orthogonal polarizations:
- vertical vs. horizontal or
- left-pand circular vs. right-hand circular There is only 3 dB discrimination between circular and linear (vertical or horizontal) polarization. interference can sometimes be overcome by changing antenna polarization at both ends of the link, 5. Transmit Power The maximum Jevel into the receiver is -30 dBm. Above this level, errors may occur in the receive data stream. Transmit output power should be reduced on very short paths to avoid overload, 6. Equipment/Antenna Location Occasionally, interference is caused by the radio or the antenna being too close to another similar transmitter. Moving the radio, the antennas, or the interfering equipment can reduce or eliminate interference. ke interference countermeasures rely {fo some extent on the . y: measurement of the received interference fevel and frequency.
, . Prior to turning up a new hop, a spectrum analyzer can be used to moniter the spectrum at each end to check for possible interfering signals. See Section 4.8.1 for more details. SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-13 G INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 4.8.1 Use of a Spectrum Analyzer to Evaluate Potential Interference Connecting to the antenna and using peak hold" on a spectrum analyzer, the spectrum across the receive frequency range of the radio can be swept and any signals being received at levels above the radios specified threshold identified. 'f potential interfering signals are found, then the Tsunami frequency plan can be changed to avoid a receive channel which may contain significant interlerence (see Section 4.2). For example, interference may be reduced by moving from the A1/A2 pian to the B1/B2 plan or by swapping terminals or RF filters so that A1 becomes A2. wy Signals outside the receiver frequency range may be ignored:
Ay they will nol cause interference. lf a spectrum analyzer is not available, the RSL voltage can be used to indicate the background noise and interference level within the receiver AF filter band when the far-end transmitter is turned off. With the far-end radio turned off, if an ASL voltage level below the radio's threshold level is measured, there is potentially interference in this frequency channel. When using a spectrum analyzer for determining the presence of interference, very narrow resolution bandwidth settings must be used to detect signals down to the radio's threshold
(approximately -80 dBm, depending on radio type). rt PAGE 4-14 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WESTERN JULY 2000 Multiplex 4.9 Back-fo-Back Testing Back-to-back testing, as shown in Figure 4-1, is an ideal method of testing the Tsunami radios. This testing eliminates link problems caused by auxiliary equipment, instailation, or the radio path and isolates potential radio hardware problems. Back-to-back testing must be performed with both radios at the same location. The following test equipment is required:
** DC power source capable of supplying approximately 90 Watts (total) to the radios (or two AC adapters) One low-loss coaxial cable, N-to-N male
* One (or more} coaxial in-line calibrated fixed attenuators, 40 to 80 dB total attenuation The following test equipment may also be useful to perform further testing of the Tsunami radio:
+ BER tester
* Variable (60 dB range or more) RF attenuator (rated for the proper frequency, 2.4 or 5.8 GHz)
+ RF power meter Back-to-back testing must be performed to verify a radio problem before returning any radio to the factory for repair. When the equipment is connected as shown in Figure 4-1, both Tsunami radios shauld have no alarm conditions. If these conditions have been met, then it is likely that the Tsunami radio is operating in accordance to specifications. If errors or alarms occur during this test, verify that ail DIP switch settings are properly set. If alarms or errors are still present, the radio is likely to be faulty. If further troubleshooting is required, a variable RF attenuator can be inserted between the radios to fade down the path to determine that the threshold specification is being met. The threshoid tests can be run in both directions to isolate the radio problem (if any}. More information testing is provided in Section 4.10. An RF power meter can be used to individually test each radios output power. rere SECTION 4; TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-15 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL JULY 2000 Multiplex Figure 4-1: Back-to-Back Test Configuration not supplied between radios. You must provide a minimum of 40
@ The Tsunami radios will be damaged if appropriate attenuation is dB and no more than 80 dB atienuation between the two radios. PAGE 4-16 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN Multiplex 4.10 LINK Testing Link testing is the preferred way to evaluate a radio links performance. It can be performed from end-to-end or in link test mode {which tests both directions of the radio path). Figure 4-2 illustrates a typical test configuration (which may include the radio's path instead of in-line attenuators). Figure 4-2 illustrates a typical test configuration for end-to-end testing. When performing testing, make sure of the following:
- Disconnect all 100BaseT inputs and outputs to both radios.
- Verify all configuration settings. Link testing may be performed on the bench, with two terminals back to back, or over the radio path. Also, it may be performed from end-to-end (which requires two 100BaseT test sets over a link, the far-end unit slaved to the near-end unit's clock) or in loopback mode, as described in Section 4.9. if link testing indicates an unacceptable level of errors, follow the instructions in Section 4.6.1. or perform a back-to-back test as described in Section 4.9. Antenna Antenna aa RF Tsunami Tsunami
[ cee |
[ cee |
Figure 4-2: End-to-End Test Configuration i SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-17 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 4.11 Network Management System (NMS) The Tsunarri 1GO0BaseT radio piatiorm provides multiple methods of managing the radio network:
1) SNMP 2) Browser (IE, Netscape, etc.) graphical user interface 3) Software upgrade procedure 4) TelNet (via VT100 session using Windows Hyperlink) 4.11.1 SNMP Use your favorite SNMP access software such as HP OpenView. 4.11.2 Browser GUI Use !nternet Explorer or Netscape to access the radio by typing in its IP address. If you are setting up the radios for the first time, the default IP address is: 10.0.0.1 You will have to configure your computer to this domain first by setting its address to 10.0.0.2 and then changing the radio's IP to one within the domain of your network. After changing one radios IP address (see Configuration tab) change the other radio's IP address also, but not io the same address of the previous radio. Reconfigure the IP address of your computer to it's original address and then restart the PC so it is now in the same domain as the radios. The browser interface shows a virtual front panel of the radio that is addressed. To view the front panel of the associated far-end radio, click on the window that is located on the virtual front pane!
(see following illustrations). Illustrations on the next few pages of this manual provide details on all browser screens and operations. 4.11.3 In-band NMS Set-up Use a 4-port (or larger) 10/100 switch (recommended as opposed to a hub that will also work} at each radio to operate the NMS in-band with the 100BaseT traffic. The NMS port can have a unique domain that is valid only with the PC thal is being used for network management and system-wide operational status and will not interfere with 100BaseT traffic as the radio's MAC address plus its 1P address are unique. Radios are set at the factory to IP addr: 10.0.0.1. Temporally set your PCs domain (write down its present IP address) to a suggested setting of PC=10.0.0.5-the PC will force a re-boot. Re-boot the PC computer attached to the first radio's 10BaseT NMS port and jog-in to radio NMS wfavorite browser (IE or Netscape) after log-in (manager:manager). Change the IP address
(Configuration) to an unused one in your domain (if you want to also change the password at this time, do this first). Do the same with other radio (may have to reboot computer attached to this other 10.0.0.1 radio as the other's MAC address does not match the MAC/IP address the PC knows about}. Set the IP address this radio to a different iP address in your normal operating domain. Set your PC back to its original domain (will force reboot again). This should allow for typical LAN operation. Type http://10.0.0.1/index.htm to gain initial access. PAGE 4-18 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATIGN AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WESTERN JULY 2000 Multiplex Login Screen 4 Enter User Name and Password. If using for the first time or the radio has been reset, use:
Full User Rights:
User Name: manager Password: manager Limited User Rights:
User Name: operator Password: operator It's advisable to change the password setting on the administration (Admin) page te protect radio settings, configuration and illegal entry into the radio system Login Screen 2 With default Name and Password Click on Log On to gain entry I SECTION 4: TROUBLE SHOOTING PAGE 4-145 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 Device Screen wwetenn Tsunami model information ae Configuration 1 The radios characteristics can be modified from this page. The Current column indicates current settings and the New column the radio setting(s) that can be changed. Use the pull-
down menus to select the new setting. Then click on the Set button to invoke the setting. In some cases it may be necessary to refresh the screen to see changes to settings. Warning: the Tx/Rx Frequency can not be changed without also changing the physical diplexer. I S PAGE 4-20 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WESTERN JULY 2006 Multiplex Help Screen MERED At any time, on any page. clicking on Help will 7) ttppuris cresent | 17 Inputis NOT open a separate help window to facilitate F, input earn ao peee ey e operation of the Browser NMS. lgisabled 5k f i, [NOT coda Tt code vioietion Use the help page to provide details on the toe olation 316 tenor configuration settings. : setected || Setected |e Ling dnveris, | Linechiverisin. Jedequate,.. Fautbconditfion. =
: ole a inectite all's in Use the window close box to dispense with the = [| i rier jes 0) [date Se a07:
help screen when finished. [Redoinkis. | |RediofnkNOT. Syne "| opsyaciorizad = establistied:
Configuration 3 Scroll down to see the complete list of radio configuration settings. Here is where the radio's IP setting can be modified from the default 10.0.0.1 70545704 ore Panes ee Ee i |
cs2s7 12851 former Sawai) Note: To return to defaults, power up the radio t aa 22982560 7 pale while depressing the iink test button. a SECTION 4, TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-21 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL fe Tsunami FAMILY We s TERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex SULY 2000 Performance 1 Running cata on the operation of the radio link. To reset the historical data, click on History Reset.
: Fa Ed id _ f Fa Eos ink bo Note alarm bar between front panel depiction " a ced unk bow and performance data. - 2 ek in Far End Unk Down Fae Ene Lak Down Performance 2 New screen afier resetting history. i PAGE 4-22 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunam: FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES We 4 TERN JULY 2000 Multiplex Alarms Both near-end and Far-end information on the running status of the link are displayed on this singie page. oait 00:8 oa0 Administration Change the default password (manager or operator) for subsequent entry into the browser NMS. Click on set after changing the password. if you forget the password, you must fully reset the radio by halding in the far-end button on the front of the radio while powering it up. tT SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-23 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Tsunami FAMILY WESTER N FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 Contact Information The E-mail and the URL links are active text if selected. Each will start your e-mail or browser when either is clicked on. Link failure indication!
If the link is jost, the severely errored seconds will display the amount of time the fink was not passing sufficient data. In this example, the link had almost seven seconds of corrupt data since the last time the history had been reset (1271468 seconds or 353 hours or almost 15 days}. ee PAGE 4-24 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (
Multiplex 4.11.2.1 NMS Help screen details:
LEDs Green = Radio hardware .K. Radio Fail Red = Hardware failure detected Green = Error-free operation Yellow = Bit errors occurring Red = Excessive bit errors or radio link failure Green = 100BaseT data transmit present Yellow = 100BaseT port connected (no data present) Off = No 100BaseT connection detected Green = 100BaseT data receive present Yellow = 100BaseT port connected (no data present) Off = No 100BaseT connection detected COLL Yellow = Coltisions occurring on 100BaseT (half-duplex mode}
FAR END Red = Alarm(s) present on the far-end radio**
Green = Tx or Rx data present on the NMS interface NMS (10BaseT} Yellow = NMS interface connected (no data present) Off = No NMS interface connection detected Green = Alarm enabled and T1 connection detected Red = Alarm enabled and no T1 connection detected Yellow = Alarm disabled and T1 connection detected Off = Alarm disabled and ne T1 connection detected THINPUT
* Radio Fail, RF Link (yellow or red), T1 Input (yellow or red) Configuration T1 Line Code AMI/B8ZS setting for the T1 interface T1 Line Build Out T1 interface line tength setting if selected, automatic injection of 1's into the T4 data stream during RF Link red alarm state T1 input Alarm lf selected. activates alarm on loss of T1 signal SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-25 T1 AIS @BER=10e-3 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
; INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 Activates loopback at the T1 input port of the near-end, 11 Nearend Radio Loopback towards the far-end of the link Activates loopback at the T1 input port of the fer-end, j towards the near-end of the link Orderwire Address Orderwire telephone address (any 2 digit number 00-99) Security code set by user (any 6 bytes=12 characters) Valid characters are 0-9, A-F only (2 to the 48 codes) Note: Must match code on far-end radio to establish link Example: 3A45EBA27F65 or BDAF3976D2C5 T1 Far-end Radio Loopback Link Security Code Selects Tx and Rx frequencies setting must match installed diplexer filter assembly - see manual for detaits Ethernet Duplex Selects half or full duplex for the 100BaseT interface Enables the ability to acquire and store |P addresses for efficient bridging operation (normally enabled) Fiber Optic Interface Enabies the fiber 100BaseT interface Configure the IP address for the network management Ethernet interface Tx/Rx Frequency Learning Filter Device IP Address Configure the subnet mask for the network Device Subnet Mask management Ethernet interlace Configure the Get community string for the radio's SNMP Get Community SNMP network management agent Configure the 'Set community string for the radio's SNMP Set Community SNMP network management agent Performance Current BER Current estimated RF link bit error rate Current RSL (dBm) Current estimated received signal level, in dBm Number of seconds that incurred an error since the last reset of the "clear history" function. Indicates errored packets. Errored Seconds PAGE 4-26 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WESTERN JULY 2000 Multiplex Number of seconds that incurred errors in excess of Severely Errored Seconds BER=10e-6 since the last reset of the "clear history" function Usually indicates total loss of data/packets, not just errors Min RSL (dBm) Minimum estimated received signal level (in dBm) measured since the last reset of the "clear history" function Max RSL (dBm) Maximum estimated received signal jevel (in dBm) measured since the jast reset of the "clear history" function Number of seconds since the last reset of the "clear history"
Elapsed Seconds Since Reset . function Alarms T1 Input is present or T1 input alarm is disabled T1 input is NOT present and T1 input alarm is enabled T1 Code Violation No T1 code violation error detected T1 code violation error detected SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-27 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 4.11.4 Software Update Download Procedure Software download procedure on Tsunami 400 (second release V 2.0):
1) Connect the host PC tot the radio terminal through the NMS 10BaseT port 2) Point the browser to the radio's Web page "http//xxx.xxx..0x.xxx/upload. htm".
(For factory default use 10.0.0.1 for the http: address}
3) Login as manager' for name and password on the GUI prompt. 4) Follow the instructions on the screen. a) Enter the file name you want to upload, e.g. (acts_nmu.udl software bianary image file}, or select the browse button and point to the proper location. b) While the file name is displayed on the screen, select the install button. c) It will display a status child window indicating it is erasing and writing to the unused Bank.. (Note the Bank # for ref.}
d) After it is complete, you will see this message "File upload finished and system will reboot! Restart browser to logon again"
e) Now, you can re-enter the upload GUI and insure the new uploaded Bank is valid and is the current Bank in use. Memory Banks:
The radio has two banks of flash memory available, Bank 0 and Bank 7, only one bank will be in use at a time. The radio will automatically utilize the new uploaded bank. In addition, through the procedure, you can also manually select Bank 0 or Bank 1 by selecting the (switch) button. Switching between Banks is quick and you will need to re-start the browser, Also, to determine if a flash memory Bank has any software, you can read the Bank status. E.g. Valid or invalid, invalid indicating that it is an empty memory Bank. PAGE 4-28 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
( Multiplex 4.41.5 Telnet Use a standard TELNET session (i.e. Windows Hyperlink}. Program will emulate a VT100 monitor. Plug into the radio's CONFiGuration port Set the session to an unused COM port (e.g. COM1) and use 19,200 baud, 8 bits, No parity and One stop bit. Cable is two (2) DB-9F connectors with pins 2-3, 3-2 and 5-5 using 3 conductor wire. To start a session (type what is within the single quotes and then the Enter key):
Hit the PCs CR/Enter key two (2) times after the radio has reinitialized Type 1 and CR/Enter to enter the User Name and then Enter key (factory defauit=manager) Type 2 and CR/Enter to enter the Password and then the Enter key (factory default= manager) Type a and Enter Key to accept the two entries - you should now see a menu list Any time you wish fo go back to a previous screen, type 0 for out (if an o does not exit from the page you working from, use logout to exit). There are many user changeable functions that may not be present in the browser such as setting the Default Gateway if the radio's NMS port is connected through a router. As an example, the following steps can be used to check the radios Network Status:
From the NMU Main Menu, type 3 and Enter. Note the radios IP address, subnet mask, MAC address and other radio parameters. Example 2: Set a Default Gateway:
From the main menu (after fogging in), type 11 to get to the VxWorks Shell prompt (->). Type help to get a list of all the advanced commands. Use the Enter key or 'Q to complete. From the -> prompt, type netHelp to see a list of the network help commands
(Use Enter key or Q' to quit/stop). From the -> prompt, type nmuHelp to see a list of the nmu (Network Management Unit) commands (Use Enter key or Q' to quit/stop). From the -> prompt, type staticShow to check to see if there is a current Default Gateway already set (if set, you may want to write down the settings for future re-use). Type staticAdd to get to the Default Gateway setup command. Note the example. SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING PAGE 4-29 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Tsunami FAMILY Me FSTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES uitiplex JULY 2000 Your Notes on the Tsunami Radio PAGE 4-30 SECTION 4: TROUBLESHOOTING Tsunamt FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
( Multiplex 5. Appendices Appendix A - Digital Interface Specifications 1. General Characteristics 100baseT (IEEE 802.3u) Fully compliant to Ethernet V.2 2. Specifications
: 4024 addresses (automatic tearning and aging) Bitering. -
; 45,000 pps. I: Data: Rate : Up:to. throughput of particular radio model Lee eee en Delay Spans Ooo fe -2-5Arames 2 |
Buffer: - : ~ 4000 packets {200 kbytes) Duplex Fullor half Table A-1: Interconnection Specification nn SECTION 5 APPENDICES PAGE 5-1 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
; INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2006 Appendix B 100BaseT and 10BaseT Connections 100BaseT 16BaseT INTERFACE INTERFACE
|} LI Figure B-1: Fast Ethernet & Ethernet NMS Connectors PAGE 5-2 SECTION 5: APPENDICES INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Me FSTERN JULY 2000 ultiplex Appendix C Networking Q&As Q: What is Ethernet?
A: Ethernet is a type of network cabling and signaling specifications (OS! Mode! layers 1
[physical] and 2 [data fink]} originally developed by Xerox in the late 1970. The IEEE's
(Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) used Ethernet Version 2 as the basis for the 802.3 CSMA/CD network standard Q: What is an 802.3 network?
A: That's IEEE-ish for Ethernet. Q: What is CSMA/CD?
A: CSMA/CD is the media access control mechanism used by Ethernet and 802.3 networks, in other words, it determines how a packet of data is placed on the wire. CSMA/CD stands for "Carrier Sense Multiple Access, with Collision Detection". Before an Ethernet device puts a packet on the wire", it listens to find if another device is already transmitting. Once the device finds the wire is clear, it starts sending the packet while aiso listening to hear if another device started sending at the same time (which is called a collision). Refer to the Q&A on collisions for more info about this phenomena.
@: What is an OS! Model?
A: The Open Systems Interconnect (OS!) reference model is the !SO (International Standards Organization) structure for the "idea!" network architecture. This Model outlines seven areas, or layers. for the network. These layers are (from highest to lowest). LAYER 7) Applications: Where the user applications software lies. Such issues as file access and transfer (FTP), virtual terminal emulation. Internet connections (HTTP}, inter-
process communication and the like are handied here. 6) Presentation: Differences in data representation are dealt with at this level. For example, UNIX-style line endings (CR only} might be converted to MS-DOS style
(CRLF), or EBCIDIC to ASCII character sets 5) Session: Communications between applications across a net- work is controlled at the session layer. Testing for out-of-sequence packets and handling two-way communication are handied here. 4) Transport: Makes sure the lower three layers are doing their job correctly, and provides a transparent. logical data stream between the end user and the network service s/he is using. This is the lower layer that provides local user services. 3) Network: This layer makes certain that a packet sent from one device to another actually gets there in a reasonable period of time. Routing and flow control are performed here. This is the lowest layer of the OSi model that can remain ignorant of i SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-3 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
. Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multipiex JULY 2000 the physical network 2) Data Link: This layer deals with getting data packets on and off the physical layer. error detection and correction and retransmission. This layer is generally broken into two sub-layers: The LLC (Logical Link Control} on the upper half, which does the error checking, and the MAC (Medium Access Control) on the lower half, which deais with getting the data on and off the physical layer (wire, fiber and Tsunami Wireless Bridges). 1) Physical: The nuts and bolts layer. Here is where the cable, fiber, radio, connector and signaling specifications are defined. Q: What does an Ethernet packet look like?
A. See the information below, as described in the National Databook. The Ethernet packet preambie is normally generated by the chipset. Software is responsible for the destination address, source address, type. and cata. The chips normally will append the frame check sequence te----------- +
| Preamble -
| 62 bits #& series of alternating 1's and O's used by the
| Ethernet receiver te acquire bit synchronization.
tonecne nee n ne +
| Stari Of Frame Delimiter -
1 2 bits Two consecutive i bits used to acquire byte I alignment.
} Destination Ethernet Adcress j 6 bytes Address of the intended receiver.
! The broadcast address is eli i's. fo nen anne ee +
| Source Ethernet Address -
| 6 bytes The unigue Ethernet address of the sending
| station. teenen naan nee +
| Length or Type fieid -
For IEEE 802.3 this -s the number of bytes of data. Data -
Short packets must be padded to 46 byces.
| | Frame Check Sequence (CRC) -
i 4 bytes The FCS is e 32 bit CRC calculated usine I the AUTODIN II polynomial. The shortest packet is: 6 + 6 + 2 + 46 = 60 bytes The longest packet is. 6+ 6 +24 1500
= 1514 bytes Q: What is a MAC address?
PAGE 5-4 SECTION 5: APPENDICES Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
( Multipfex A: It is the unique hexadecimal (numbering base 16) serial number assigned to each Ethernet network device to identify it on the network.. With Ethernet devices {as with most other network types}, this address is permanently set at the time of manufacturer, though it can usually be changed through software (though this is generally a Very Bad Thing to do}. Q: Why must the MAC address fo be unique?
A: Each communicating end device (not bridges) has a unique MAC address. so that it will be able to exclusively grab packets off the network meant for it IF MAC addresses are not unique, there is no way to distinguish between two devices. Devices on the network watch network traffic and look for their own MAC address in each packet to determine whether they should decode it or not. Special circumstances exist for broadcasting to every device. Q: Is there a special numbering scheme for MAC addresses?
A: The MAC addresses are exactly 6 bytes in length, and are usuaily written in hexadecimal as 12:34:56:78:90:AB (the colons may be omitted, but generally make the address more readable}. Each manufacturer of Ethernet devices applies for a certain range of MAC addresses they can use. The first three bytes of the address determine the manufacturer. RFC-1700 (available via FTP) lists some of the manufacturer-assigned MAC addresses. A more up-to-date fisting of vendor MAC address assignments is available on ftp.Ics.mit.edu in pub/map/Ethernet-codes. Q: What does CRC mean?
A: Cyclical Redundancy Check - A method of detecting errors in a message by performing a mathematical caicuiation on the bits in the message and then sending the results of the calculation along with the message. The receiving work-station performs the same calculation on the message data as it receives it and then checks the results against those transmitted at the end of the message. If the results don't match, the receiving end asks the sending end to send again. Q: What do 10Base5, 10BaseT, 10Base2, etc mean?
A: These are the IEEE names for the different physical types of Ethernet. The "10" stands for maximum signaling speed: 10MHz. Base means Baseband. 10BaseT, where the T means twisted pair, and 10BaseF where the F means fiber (see the following Q&A for specifics). This actually comes from the IEEE committee number for that media. In actual practice:
10Base2 Is a maximum of 10MHz Ethernet running over thin. 50 Ohm baseband coaxial cable. 10Base2 is also commonly referred to as thin-Ethernet or Cheapernet. 10Base5 is 10MHz Ethernet running over standard (thick) 50 Ohm baseband coaxial cabling. 10BaseF is Ethernet running over fiber-optic cabling. 10BaseT is Ethernet running over unshielded, twisted-pair cabling. Q: What is UTP?
er SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-5 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 A: Twisted pair cables. UTP is for Unshielded, Twisted Pair, while STP is for Shielded, Twisted Pair. UTP is what's typically installed by phone companies (though this is often not of high enough quality for high- speed network use) and is what 10BaseT Ethernet runs over. UTP is graded according to its data carrying ability (e.g., Level 3, Level 4, Level 5). 10BaseT Ethernet requires at least Level 3 cable. Many sites now install only Level-5 UTP (CATegory 5), even though level 4 is more than sufficient for 10BaseT, because of the greater likelihood that emerging high-speed standards will require cable with better bandwidth capabilities. Q: Are there any restrictions on how Ethernet is cabled?
A: Yes, there are many, and they vary according to the media used. First of all, there are distance limitations: }OBaseT generally accepted to have a maximum run of 100-150M, but is really based on signal loss in dB's (11.5db maximum loss source to destination}
Then there are limitations on the number of repeaters and cable segments allowed between any two stations on the network. The rule is, any possible path between two network devices on an unbridged/unrouted network cannot pass through more than 4 repeaters or hubs, nor more than 3 populated cable segments. 10BaseT and 10BaseF are star-wired, so there is no minimum distance requirement between devices, since devices cannot be connected serially. You can install up to the Ethemet maximum of 1024 stations per network with both 10BaseT and
{0BaseF. Q: When should | choose 10BaseT, 10BaseF (or others)?
A: The specific environment and application must be considered when selecting your media type. However, there are some general rules-of-thumb that you can consider:
Avoid using copper between buildings. The electrical disturbances caused by lightning, as well as naturally occurring differences in ground potential over distance, can very quickly and easily cause considerable damage to equipment and people. The use of fiber-optic cabling between buildings eliminates network cabling as a safety risk. There are also various wireless media available for inter-buiiding links, such as laser. spread-spectrum RF and microwave. 10BaseT is the most fiexible topology for LANs, and is generally the best choice for most network installations. 10BaseT hubs, or multi-hub concentrators, are typically installed in a central location to the user community, and inexpensive UTP cabling is run to each network device (which may be 100m, or 330ft, from the hub}. The signaling technology is very reliable, even in somewhat noisy enviranments, and 10BaseT hubs will usually detect many network error conditions and automatically shut-down the offending port(s) without affecting the rest of the network (unless, of course, the offending port was your server, shared printer, or router to the rest of the world. 10BaseF, and its predecessor, FOIRL, are the only recommended topologies for inter-
building links. However, they need not be limited to this role. 10BaseF can also be run to the desktop, though the cost is prohibitively high in all but the most specialized environments (generally, extremely noisy manufacturing facilities, or very security-
PAGE 5-5 SECTION 5: APPENDICES Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (
Multiplex conscious installations). More commonly, FOIRL (and now, 10BaseF) is used inside buildings and long distance wireless connections to form backbone networks. Q: Is there an official "standard" punch down scheme for 10BaseT?
A: Get a copy of EIA/TIA-568, it covers all of that sort of stuff: horizontal. vertical, connectors, patch cords, cross-connects. etc. Q: Is it safe to run Unshield Twisted Pair next to power cable?
A: According to EIA/TIA-569, the standard wiring practices for running data cabling and companion to the above referenced EIA/TIA-568, you should not run data cable parallel to power cables. However, in reality. this should not be a problem with networks such as 10BaseT. 10BaseT uses differential signaling to pick the data signals off the wire. Since any interference from nearby power lines will usually affect all pairs equally, anything that is not canceted-out by the twists in the UTP should be ignored by the receiving network interface. Q: Can | connect the 10BaseT interface of two devices directly together, without using a hub?
A: Yes, but not more than 2 devices, and you also need a special jumper cable between the two 10BaseT ports:
mh tw Roe Q: What is a "segment"?
A: A piece of network wire bounded by bridges, routers, repeaters or terminators.
@ What is a "subnet"?
A: Another overloaded term. it can mean, depending on the usage, a segment, a set of machines grouped together by a specific protocol feature (note that these machines do not have to be on the same segment, but they could be} or a big nylon thing used to capture enemy subs Q: What is a repeater?
A Arepeater acts on a purely electrical level to connect to segments. Ail it does is amplify and reshape (and, depending on the type, possibly retime) the analog waveform to extend network segment distances. it does not know anything about addresses or forwarding, thus it cannot be used to reduce traffic as a bridge can in the example above. Q: What is a "hub"?
SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-7 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 A: A hub is a common wiring point for star-topology networks, anc is a common synonym for concentrator (though the latter generally has additional features or capabilities). 10BaseT and 10BaseF Ethernet and many proprietary network topologies use hubs to connect multiple cable runs in a star-wired network topology into a single network. Hubs have multiple ports to attach the different cable runs. Some hubs {such as 10BaseT} include electronics to regenerate and retime the signa! between each hub port. Others (such as 10BaseF} simply act as signal splitters, similar to the multi-tap cable-TV splitters you might use on your home antenna coax (of course, 10BaseF uses mirrors to split the signals between cables). Q: What is a bridge?
A. A bridge will connect to distinct segments and transmit traffic between them. This allows you to extend the maximum size of the network while still not breaking the maximum wire length, atiached device count, or number of repeaters for a network segment. Q: What does a "learning bridge"?
A. A learning bridge monitors MAC (OSI layer 2) addresses on both sides of its connection and attempts to learn which addresses are on which side. It can then decide when it receives a packet whether it should cross the bridge or stay local (some packets may not need to cross the bridge because the source and destination addresses are both on one side}. if the bridge receives a packet that it doesnt know the addresses of, it will forward it by default. IEEEs standard for a learning bridge is 802.1D. Q: Is there a maximum number of bridges allowed on a network?
A: Per {EEE 802.1 {d), the maximum number of concatenated brides in a bridged LAN is 7. This number is rather arbitrary, however, and is based on simulations of application performance with expected bridge delays. In addition, the number assumes that all bridges are LOCAL (no remote WAN connections}, and that the default Hold Time of 1 second is in place (this is the time after which a bridge will discard a frame it is holding). This prevents extra-late frame delivery. (i.e, a frame should never be delivered more than ~7 seconds after is it sent). The rule of thumb for wireless WAN bridged LANs is to limit the number of hops to 4. Q: What is a router?
A: Routers work much like bridges, but they pay attention to the upper network layer protocols (OSI layer 3} rather than data link layer (OSI layer 2) protocols. A router will decide whether to forward a packet by jooking at the protocol Jevel addresses (for instance, TCP/IP addresses) rather than the MAC address. Because routers work at layer 3 of the OSI stack, it is possible for them to transfer packets between different media types {i.e., leased lines, Ethernet, token ring, X.25, Frame Relay and FDDI). Many routers can also function as bridges. PAGE 5-8 SECTION 5: APPENDICES INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WE 5 TERN Multiplex JULY 2006 Q: So should | use a router or a bridge?
A: There is no absolute answer to this. Your network layout, type and amount of hosts and traffic, and other issues (both technical and non-technical} must be considered. Routing would always be preferable to bridging except that routers are slower and usually more expensive (due to the amount of processing required to look inside the physical packet and determine which interface that packet needs to get sent out), and that many applications use non-routable protocols. Rules of thumb:
Bridges are usually good choices for small networks with few, if any, slow redundant links between destinations or for connecting distant LANs. Further, bridges may be your only choice for certain protocols. unless you have the means to encapsulate {tunnel} the un-
routable protocol inside a routable protocol. Routers are usually much better choices for larger networks, particularly where you want to have a relatively clean WAN backbone. Routers are better at protecting against protocol errors (such as broadcast storms) and bandwidth utilization. Since routers look deeper inside the data packet, they can also make forwarding decisions based on the upper-layer protocols. Occasionally, a combination of the two devices are the best way fo go. Bridges can be used to segment small networks that are geographically close to each other, between each other and the router to the rest of the WAN. Q: Are there problems mixing Bridging & Routing?
A: Only if you plan on having bridged links in parallel with routed links. You need to be very careful about running bridges providing links in parallel to a router. Bridges may forward broadcast requests which will confuse the router there are iots of protocols you may not think of filtering (e.g. ARP, Apple ARP over 802.3 etc. etc.). Also, DECnet routers have the same MAC address on all ports. This. will probably cause the bridge to think it is seeing an Ethernet loop. Q: Who makes the fastest/easiest/most advanced bridges or routers?
A: The IETF runs bench marks on a wide selection of wired/fiber bridges and routers. Network Computing runs bench marks for wireless routers (point-to-multipoint) and bridges (point-to-point). Q: What does "IPG" mean?
A: The InterPacket Gap {more properly referred to as the InterFrame Gap, or IFG) is an enforced quiet time of 9.6 us between transmitted Ethernet frames. Q: What means "promiscuous mode"?
A: Promiscuous mode is a condition where the network interface controller wiil pass all Ethernet frames. regardless of destination address, up to the higher level network layers. SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-9 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2090 Normally the network controller will only pass up frames that have that device's destination address. However, when put in promiscuous mode, all frames are passed on up the network stack regardless of destination address. Promiscuous mode is usually used by network monitoring tools and transparent bridges. Q: What Is a collision?
A: A condition where two devices detect that the network is idle and end up trying to send packets at exactly the same time (within 1 round-trip delay}. Since only one device can transmit at a time, both devices must back off and attempt to retransmit again. The retransmission algorithm requires each device to wait a random amount of time, so the two are very likely to retry at different times, and thus the second one will sense that the network is busy and wait until the packet is finished. If the two devices retry at the same time (or almost the same time} they will collide again, and the process repeats until either the packet finally makes it onto the network without collisions, or 16 consecutive collision occur and the packet is aborted. Q: What causes a collision?
A: See above. Ethernet is a CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access/ Collision Detect}
system. It is possible to not sense carrier from a previous device and attempt to transmit anyway, or to have two devices attempt to transmit at the same time: in either case a collision results. Ethernet is particularly susceptible to performance loss from such problems when people ignore the "rules" for wiring Ethernet. Q: How many collisions are too many?
A: This depends on your application and protoco!. In many cases, collision rates of 50% will not cause a large decrease in perceived throughput. If your network is slowing down and you notice the percentage of collisions is on the high side, you may want try segmenting your network with either a bridge or router to see if performance improves. Q: How do | reduce the number of collisions?
A: Disconnect devices from the network. Seriously, you need to cut- down on the number of devices on the network segment to affect the collision rate. This is usually accomplished by splitting the segment into two pieces and putting a bridge or router in between them. Q: What is a late collision?
A: A late collision occurs when two devices transmit at the same time, but due to cabling errors {most commonly, excessive network segment length or repeaters between devices) neither detects a collision. The reason this happens is because the time to propagate the signal from one end of the network to another is tonger than the time to put the entire packet on the network, so the two devices that cause the late collision never see that the other's sending until after it puts the entire packet on the network. Late collisions are detected by the transmitter after the first "slot time" of 64 byte times. They PAGE 5-10 SECTION 5; APPENDICES INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES . WESTERN JULY 2000 Multiplex are only detected during transmissions of packets longer than 64 bytes. It's detection is exactly the same as for a normal collision: it just happens "too late."
Typical causes of late collisions are segment cable lengths in excess of the maximum permitted for the cable type. faulty connectors or improper cabling, excessive numbers of repeaters between network devices, and defective Ethernet transceivers or controllers. Another negative concerning late collisions is that they occur for small packets also, but cannot be detected by the transmitter. A network suffering a measurable rate of late collisions (on large packets} is also suffering lost small packets. The higher protocols do not cope well with such losses. Well, they cope, but at much reduced speed. A 1% packet loss is enough to reduce the speed of NFS by 90% with the default retransmission timers. That's a 10 times increase of the problem!
Finaily, Ethernet controllers do not retransmit packets lost to late collisions. a Q: What is a jam?
A: When a workstation receives a collision, and it is transmitting, it puts out a jam so all other stations will see the collision also. When a repeater detects a collision on one port, it puts out a jam on all other ports. causing a collision to occur on those lines that are transmitting, and causing any non-transmitting stations to wait to transmit. Q: What is a broadcast storm?
A: An overloaded term that describes an overloaded protocol. Basically it describes a condition where devices on the network are generating traffic that by its nature causes the generation of even more traffic. The inevitable result is a huge degradation of performance or complete loss of the network as the devices continue to generate more and more traffic. This can be related to the physical transmission or to very high jevel protocols. Q: How do | recognize a broadcast storm?
A: That depends on what level it is occurring. Basically you have to be aware of the potential for it beforehand and be looking for it, because in a true broadcast storm you will probably be unable to access the network. This can change dramatically for a higher level protocol. NFS contention can result in a dramatic DROP in Ethernet traffic, yet no one will have access to resources. Q@: How can | prevent a broadcast storm?
A: Avoid protocols that are prone to it. Route (with routers} or Bridge (with wired/wireless bridges) when it is practical. Q: What is *high traffic on an Ethernet? 5%? 20%? 90%?
A. High traffic is when things start slowing down to the point they are no longer acceptable There is not set percentage point, in other words. Usually start paying attention when it SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-11 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 gets over 40-50%. Q: Why do I see different throughput speeds?
A: Bridges (such as Tsunami) are ISO Layer 2 Data Link Layer (use MAC address for filtering) devices where they provide their full stated throughput. At level 2 (bridges) or 3
{routers} where hardware plays the major part, the most common tester is the SmartBits 200 product from NetCom Systems. At Application Layer 7, you will see less than 40%
throughput from the maximum capacity measured w/SmartBits due to the increased protocol/software overhead at that level. Layer 7 can be tested with software such as Ganymedes Chariot or Qcheck product. As an example: testing copper CATS cable with SmartBits will test 100% throughput (let's say you can send/rcv a full 10Mbps). At Layer 7 you will be transferring data at the 10Mbps rate. but only 4Mbps of user data will transfer (Ethernet has a high overhead of bytes added to each data packet each time you go up a layer). The advantage is the more complex overhead makes the data virtually resilient to corruption and minor errors (i.e. collisions), its easy to reroute and can use inexpensive plug/play devices like hubs/switches instead of multiplexers as used in the telco industry (i.e. LYNX T1 radios) Westem Multiplex tests at Layer 2 where bridges are defined. At layer 7 (Application Layer), you will see less than 40% or more depending on the other traffic that may be on the LAN as this layer is more dependent on the type of data being sent (it does not matter if it's wire, fiber or any Ethernet bridge -wired or wireless). Another way to look at it: the model 31145 12Mbps (10Mbps 10BaseT+T1/E1 wayside) bridge will test the same as a piece of CATS Ethemet cable. Q: How can | test an Ethernet?
A: This depends on what level you want to test. The most basic test (a.k.a., "the fire test") is to connect a pair of devices to the network and see if they can communicate with each other. If you want to test the electrical integrity of the wire (i.e., will it carry 2 signal properly}, a TDR or cable scanner that incorporates TDR and other functions. would be the most comprehensive tool. If you need to test the performance or troubleshoot protocol transmission problems, you will need special and usually very expensive software, usually coupled with custom hardware, to capture, optionally filter, and analyze the network packets. Also, see the answer to the question above. Q: What is a "TDR"?
A: A Time-Domain Reflectometer is a tool used to detect cable faults. This device operates by sending a brief signa! puise down the cable and looking for its reflection to bounce back. By analyzing the reflected pulse, it is possible to make judgments about the quality of the cable segment. More advanced units can not only detect and identify the nature of the problem, but give a reasonably accurate indication of the problem's iocation (distance from the point of the test). There is also a device known as an OTDR, which is an Optica!
Time-Domain Reflectometer for fiber-optic cables. Q: What is a "BERT'?
PAGE 5-12 SECTION 5: APPENDICES Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
( Multiplex A. Bit Error Rate Tester. This equipment is used to analyze the amount and types of errors that occur on a cable segment. Q: What (free) tools are there to monitor/decode/ete an Ethernet?
A. There are many built into most DOS Unix and other operating systems. For example, the ping command can be used to determine if a given host is alive, and will aiso tell you the round trip transmission time. The command ifconfig will tell you the status of the network interfaces. netstat will summarize statistics for network usage. DOS commands (through Windows DOS application) are:
ARP Displays and modifies the IP-to-Physical address translation tables used by address resolution protocol (ARP}. ARP -a [inet_addr] [-N if_addr]
a Displays current ARP entries by interrogating the current protocol data. If inet_addr is specified, the IP and Physical addresses for only the specified computer are displayed. If more than one network interface uses ARP, entries for each ARP table are displayed.
-g Same as -a. inet_addr Specifies an internet address.
-Nif_Laddr Displays the ARP entries for the network interface specified by if_addr
-d Deletes the host specified by inet_addr. Ss Adds the host and associates the Internet address inet_addr with the Physical address eth_addr. The Physical address is given as 6 hexadecimal bytes separated by hyphens. The entry is permanent. eth_addr Specifies a physical address. if_addr If present, this specifies the Internet address of the interface whose address translation table should be modified. If not present, the first applicable interface will be used. Example:
> arp -s 157.55.85.212 00-aa-00-62-c6-09 .... Adds a static entry.
>arp-a .... Displays the arp table. FTP Transfers files to and from a computer running an FTP server service (sometimes called 2 daemon). FTP can be used interactively. FTP [-vj [-d] [-i] [-n] [-g] [-s:filename] [-a] [-w:windowsize] [-A] [host]
~v Suppresses display of remote server responses.
-n Suppresses auto-login upon initial connection.
-i Turns off interactive prompting during multiple file transfers.
-d Enatles debugging.
-9 Disables filename globbing (see GLOB command).
-s:filename Specifies a text file containing FTP commands; the commands will SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 6-13
PAGE 5-14 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES Multiplex JULY 2000 automatically run after FTP starts.
-a Use any local interface when binding data connection.
-A login as anonymous.
-wibuffersize Overrides the default transfer buffer size of 4095. host Specifies the host name or IP address of the remoie host to connect to Notes:
- mget and mput commands take y/n/q for yes/no/quit.
- Use Conirol-C to abort commands NET CONFIG NET DIAG NET HELP NET INIT NET LOGOFF NET LOGON NET PASSWORD NET PRINT NET START NET STOP NET TIME NET USE NET VER NET VIEW Displays your current workgroup settings Runs the Micrasoft Network Diagnostics program to display diagnostic information about your network. Provides information about commands and error messages Loads protocol and network-adapter drivers without binding them to Protocol Manager. Breaks the connection between your computer and the shared Tesources to which it is connected. Identifies you as a member of a workgroup. Changes your logon password. Displays information about print queues and controls print jobs Starts services. Stops services. Dispiays the time on or synchronizes your computer's clock with the clock on a Microsoft Windows for Workgroups. Windows NT, Windows 95, or NetWare time server. Connects to or disconnects fram a shared resource or displays information about connections. Displays the type and version number of the workgroup redirector you are using. Displays a list of computers that share resources or a list of shared resources on a specific computer. For more information about a specific Microsoft NET command, type the command name followed by /? (for example, NET VIEW /?}. PING SECTION 5: APPENDICES INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES WESTERN JULY 2000 Multiplex PING [+t] [-a} [-n count] [-| size} [-f} [-i TTL] [-v TOS] [-r count] {-s count] [[-| host-itst] | [-k host-list]] [-w timeout] destination-list
+t Ping the specified host until stopped. To see statistics and continue - type Control-Break; To stop - type Control-C.
-a Resolve addresses to hostnames.
-n count Number of echo requests to send.
-| size Send buffer size.
-f Set Don't Fragment flag in packet.
-i TTL Time To Live.
~~ TOS Type Of Service.
-r count Record route for count hops.
-s count Timestamp for count hops.
-| host-list Loose source route along host-list.
- host-list Strict source route along host-list.
-w timeout Timeout in milliseconds to wait for each reply. ROUTE Manipulates network routing tables. ROUTE [-f] [command [destination] [MASK netmask] [gateway] [METRIC metric]
f Clears the routing tabies of all gateway entries. {f this is used in conjunction with one of the commands, the tables are cleared prior to running the command. command Must be one of four:
PRINT Prints a route ADD Adds a route DELETE Deletes a route CHANGE Modifies an existing route destination Specifies the destination host. MASK Specifies that the next parameter is the netmask value. netmask Specifies a subnet mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it defaults to 255.255.255.255. gateway Specifies gateway. METRIC Specifies that the next paramenter 'metric is the cost for this destination All symbolic names used for destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS. The symbolic names for gateway are looked up in the host name database file HOSTS. If the command is PRINT or DELETE, wildcards may be used for the destination and gateway, or the gateway argument may be omitted. Diagnostic Notes:
invalid MASK generates an error, that is when (DEST & MASK) != DEST, SECTION : APPENDICES PAGE 5-15 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
; INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Multiplex JULY 2000 Example> route ADD 157.0.0.0 MASK 155.0.0.0 157, 55.80.1 The route addition failed: 87 Examples:
> route PRINT
> route ADD 157.0.0.0 MASK 255.0.0.0 157.55.80.1 METRIC 3 destination Amask Agateway Ametric
> route PRINT
> route DELETE 157.0.0.0
> route PRINT SNMP Starts SNMP agent
-close Closes previously running instance of snmp
-help Displays SNMP help dialog box TELNET Opens telnet window TRACERT TRACERT [-d} [-h maximum_hops] [-j host-list} [-w timeout] target_name
-d Do not resolve addresses to hostnames.
-h maximum_hops Maxtmum number of hops to search for target.
-j host-list Loose source route along host-list.
-w timeout Wait timeout milliseconds for each reply. WINIPCFG Opens iP configuration window
/All - Display detailed information Batch - [filename] Write to file or Awinipcfg.out
/renew_all- Renew all adapters irelease_ail - Release all adapters
/renew N - Renew adapter N release N - Release adapter N Q: What books are good about Ethernet LAN's?
A: The IEEE 802.3 documents are considered the definitive source for information on Ethernet. However, these may not be suitable for all levels of users. Surprisingly, there are few good books specifically dealing with Ethernet LANs, but here are a few that you might find useful:
PAGE 5-16 SECTION 5; APPENDICES INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Tsunami FAMILY . FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES GS We $ TERN JULY 2000 : Multiplex Local Area Networks, An introduction to the technology by John E. McNamara, published by Digital Press, 1985 165 pps. with index and glossary, $29.00 ISBN 0-932376-79-7, Digital Press part number EY-00051-DP Network Troubleshooting Guide by Digital Equipment Corporation, August 1990 Approx. 278 pps. with index and glossary, $95.00 Digital Press part number EK-339AB-GD-002. These books and others are recommended in the network reading list. net-read.txt, from ftp.utexas.edu. Q: Where can | get IEEE802.x docs online?
A. Not available online. IEEE documents can be ordered directly from the IEEE themselves. You can contact them at Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 445 Hoes Lane P.O. Box 1331 Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331 U.S.A. (800) 678-IEEE Q: Where can | get EIA/TIA docs ontine?
A. Not available online They can be ordered from:
Global Engineering 800-854-7179 ES SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-17 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Muitiplex JULY 2000 Appendix D - Auxiliary Data Connectors The following figures illustrate the pin structure for al} auxiliary connections. All figures are oriented as a customer would view them, facing the connector. DC power connection information is found in Section 3.7 of the manual. VF VF OUT : = [IN Ground |
Figure D-1: VF Port Connection Out of Service Summary Alarm Relay (Form ) RSL MON TX MON Summary Alarm Relay (Form C}
Figure D-2: Alarm Port Connections RS-232 Output RS-232 Input. Ground >
RS-422 In--
RS-422 In +
RS-422 Out +
RS-422 Out
(as viewed from rear panel) Figure D-3: Config(uration) Port 9-Pin D-Style Connector Do NOT connect io RS-422 pins at any time en PAGE 5-18 SECTION 5: APPENDICES Tsunami FAMILY FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES JULY 2000 WESTERN INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (
Multiplex RS-232 Output Ground RS-232 Input RS-422 In ~
RS-422 In +
RS-422 Out +
RS-422 Out
(as viewed from rear panel) Figure D-4: AUX DATA Port 9-Pin D-Style Connector Do NOT connect to RS-422 pins at any time. i ES SECTION 5: APPENDICES PAGE 5-19 Tsunami FAMILY WESTERN FAST ETHERNET WIRELESS BRIDGES
( INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL JULY 2000 Multiplex Your Notes on the Tsunami Radio PAGE 5-20 SECTION : APPENDICES Index Accessories ARS. ee Alarm connection:
Alarms... Alignment, antenn AMI... Amtenna. Antenna connection Antenna installation Antenna planning... Calculations esses esssesssnesseeesseesseesesseseseeerutesseatisesessuateavmnsnieescetrscansqeuastusacstacsesessesnessiaesstanesseerssonuesvacsaeenseeesoeeareeees Caution ... CEPT-1... Channel plat Coaxial cable collision ..... Connections Container ... see D be 7 4 Oem yew ga wt DC... Delay. Digital Capacity DSX-L DUPIEN eee reecceeeeeeneneeteeeentcaeene ieee E Environment Errors Ethemet. Ethemet packet. F Fade margimt ccc cceseseeceesceneseteeeeeeseseesseeseetescsiessicastecesesnesesne FUUOrINg oe ee eee eee FYEQUeNCY .occssescseereeeesecceeeeenennt eset coer ieeerseas sneer Frequency plan Fresne. .... Front panel G Grounding H HDB3. hub... I Icons .. IEEE indicators . 2 Installation : . Be Inierference . seecaeseeesccatecanseensacieensearsvensteseiteaeeranvaneescneieeees 4. ISO... 1SO 900 L LAN... LAYER. jearning Line-o Link budget. Loopback. M MAC address . Mechanica Mounting N NMS. Note.. 0 Orderwire.... OSI Medel . Outpus power Output power. adjus'
P PATH occ ccceeccseeteccececseeeseeeceoaseceerseeasquseecont anaes suncensenssngerenereeeteanercapentee Path planning PING... POWEr weer Power connection Power connection, DC Power suppiy planning . Professional installation R Rear panel... 2-14 Receive signal level 414 RECEIVE ee eee esse reetertseeseee 2-3 Regulatory REN.. Repair repeater ....... RF Exposure ROUTE router RS-232. System . T Technical support Telephone Teinet....... TelNet.. Transmitter....... Troubieshooting. TUM-up wees U Update.. UTP. Ww Warranty... WINIPCFG.. For ISO Purposes -
Last Page of this Manual
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2001-08-24 | 5775 ~ 5775 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2001-03-29 | 5775 ~ 5775 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2001-08-24
|
||||
1 2 |
2001-03-29
|
|||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Proxim Wireless Corporation
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005850607
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
47633 Westinghouse Drive
|
||||
1 2 |
Fremont, California 94539
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
r******@etlsemko.com
|
||||
1 2 |
r******@itsqs.com
|
|||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
HZB
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
U5358-480
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
C**** v******
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Sr. Regulatory and Compliance Manager
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
408 3********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
408 3********
|
||||
1 2 |
c******@proxim.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Intertek Testing Services
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
D****** C********
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
1365 Adams Court
|
||||
1 2 |
Menlo Park, California 94025
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
650-4********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
650-4********
|
||||
1 2 |
d******@etlsemko.com
|
|||||
1 2 |
d******@itsqs.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Western Multiplex
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
C****** Y****
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
1196 Borregas Avenue
|
||||
1 2 |
Sunnyvale, California 94089
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
408-5********
|
||||
1 2 |
408-5********
|
|||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
408-5********
|
||||
1 2 |
408-5********
|
|||||
1 2 |
C******@wmux.com
|
|||||
1 2 |
c******@wmux.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | U-NII Radio | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | This device must be professionally installed, and may only be used in point-to-point applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 1.5 meters from all persons during normal operation. Users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions, including antenna co-location requirements of 1.1307(b)(3), for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | ||||
1 2 | This device must be professionally installed, and may only be used in point-to-point applications. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 1.5 meters from all persons during normal operation. Users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions, including antenna co-location requirements of 1.1307(b) (3), for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Intertek Testing Services NA Inc.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
J****** Q****
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
949-4********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
650-4********
|
||||
1 2 |
j******@intertek.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15E | 36 | 5300 | 5300 | 0.0017 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15E | 36 | 5775 | 5775 | 0.069 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15E | 36 | 5300 | 5300 | 0.0017 | % | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15E | 36 | 5775 | 5775 | 0.069 | % |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC